Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
i
Director Speech on 8th ASAIS 2019
Honorable Mayor of Depok City,
Honorable Director of General of Research and Development,
Honorable Director of Research and Community Services,
Honorable Keynote Speakers,
Honorable, all sponsors company representative
Honorable Guests, Presenters and Participants.
Good morning…
Assalamualaikum Wr Wb.
Salam Sejahtera untuk kita semua..
Om swatyastu…
Namo budaya, Salam Kebajikan….
Ladies and Gentlemen….
It is my pleasure to welcome all of you to The 7th ASAIS 2019 here in this lovely city. Under
the theme of: “Strengthening Human Resources and Innovation System on Vocational Education in
Supporting 4:0 Industrial Revolution which is in line with the current issue happening in global world
today. I particularly believe that this seminar will be very beneficial for us in order to make us ready
and aware in entering Asian Free Trade Community (AFTA).
I am standing here also strongly believe that the development of technology will bring us into
the borderless world which eases us to perform our daily activities. Furthermore, it assists us in
satisfying global demands which are now becoming very crucial in order to catch up with the changes
of the world. It will even help us improve the quality of our teaching and learning process, researching
and serving society, because as long as we live within society, we must do something beneficial for our
society.
The Honorable guests, speakers and participants,
As the Director of PNJ, I would wish to state once again that this international seminar offers
several informative talks as well as networking opportunities. It implies that we welcome all of you to
initiate collaborations in research and community services. I wish all of you the best and could enrich
yourselves with this ASAIS 2019 seminar experience.
At the end of my speech, before I end my speech, I would like to give additional information that we
wish this annual event ASAIS will become much better in the next year because Research and
Community Services State Polytechnic Jakarta already do cooperation with some polytechnics to
present this seminar. We believe that the cooperation and collaboration will make us stronger and more
valuable.
Ladies and Gentlemen…..
At the end of my speech, I would like to say, please enjoy the ASAIS 2019 seminar today, and find
something useful.
Thank you for your attention.
Wassalam Wr Wb.
Director of state Polytechnic of Jakarta
Abdillah, SE, M.Si
ii
COMMITTEE SPEECH ON 8TH ASAIS 2019
Dr. Dra. Iis Mariam, M.Si
Assalamualaikum Warrahmatullahi Wabarakatuh...
Good Morning All distinguished speakers and participants…
First of all, I would like to say a warm greeting to distinguished Mayor of Depok (Dr.KH.
Mohammad Idris, Lc., MA), Director of PNJ (Abdillah, SE., M.Si), and all distinguished keynote
speakers: Mr.Tatang Muttaqin,S.Sos., M.Ed., Ph.D (Director State of Apparatus National
Development Planning Agency), Ms. Wen Lin Chu, Ph.D (National Chin-Yi University, Taiwan),
Dr.Mustafa bin Andjang Achman (Tun Hussein Onn University, Malaysia), and also invited speakers:
Mr, Irham Dilmy, MBA (Global Leadership Center and also as Deputy Chairman Commission of the
Indonesian State Civil Apparatus), and Mr Saifullizan Mohn Bukari, PE (Tun Hussein Onn
University, Malaysia).
It is my pleasure to welcome all of you to The 8th ASAIS 2019 organized by P3M (The
Centre of Research and Public Services) of Politeknik Negeri Jakarta. The theme of this international
seminar this year is called: “Strengthening human resources and innovation system on vocational
education in supporting 4.0 industrial revolution” which is in line with the current issue happening in
disruption era and 4.0 industrial revolution. I particularly believe that this seminar will be very
beneficial for us in order to make us ready and aware in entering disruption era and challenging
industrial revolution. I also believe that the development of technology will bring us into the
borderless world which eases us to do our daily activities. This seminar it will help us improve the
quality of our teaching and learning in the process based on industrial need and doing community
services to make society become more economic valuable.
The distinguished speakers and participants, I would like to say once again that this
international seminar offers several informative talks as well as networking opportunities and
collaborations in research and society services. I wish all of you a successful and enriching seminar
experience. Once again, wellcome to Depok City, enjoy your seminar and thank you very much.
Wassalamualaikum Wabarakatuh..
Margo Hotel-Depok, 7 November 2019
Dr. Dra. Iis Mariam, M.Si
iii
BOARDS OF COMMITTEE
Advisors : Direktur Politeknik Negeri Jakarta
Pembantu Direktur I.
Unit in charge : Chair of P3M
Chairman
Vice Chairman
First Secretary
Treasurer
:
:
Dr. Dra. Iis Mariam, MSi.
Anis Rosyidah, SST., MT.
Nurmalisna, SH.
Reviewer Paper Section
Coordinators : Prihatin Oktivasari, SSi., MSi.
Event Section
Coordinator : Dr. Nining Latianingsih, SH,. MH.
Linguistic Section
Coordinator : Dra. Mawarta Onida, MSi.
Proceedings Section
Coordinator : Eva Azhra Latifa, ST., MT.
Bayu Pratama, ST.
Sponsorship
Coordinators : Andreas Rudi Hermawan, ST., MT.
Moch. Zaenal Abidin Eko Putro, S.Fil., MSi.
Publication and Documentation Section
Coordinators : Hata Maulana, SSi., MSi.
Secretariate
:
Sugianto
Fatimah, SE., MM.
Ir. Anik Tjandra, MM.
Muryeti, MSi.
Pusat Penelitian dan Pengabdian kepada Masyarakat (P3M)
Gedung Q, Lantai 2,
Politeknik Negeri Jakarta, Kampus Baru UI Depok,
Tlp. 021 7270036 ext 236,
website: http://asais-pnj.org/
iv
PREFACE
This proceeding contain sorted papers from Annual South East Asian International Seminar (ASAIS)
2019. ASAIS 2019 is the seventh annual international event organized by Pusat Penelitian dan
Pengabdian (P3M) Politeknik Negeri Jakarta Indonesia. This event is a forum for researchers for
discussing and exchanging the information and knowledge in their areas of interest. It aims to
promote activities in research, development and application on technology, commerce, and
humanities. We would like to express our gratiture to all technical commite members who have given
their efforts to support this seminar. We also would like to express our sincere gratitude to Higher
Education Republic of Indonesia. Finally we also would to like to thank to all of the keynote speakers,
the authors, the participant and all parties for the success of ASAIS 2019.
Editorial Team
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIRECTOR SPEECH ON ASAIS 2019………………………………………....................................i
COMMITTEE SPEECH ON ASAIS 2019……………………………………...................................ii
BOARD OF COMMITTEE.................................................................................................................iii
PREFACE ............................................................................................................................................iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS .....................................................................................................................v
LIST OF PAPER .................................................................................................................................vi
vi
LIST OF PAPER
NO TITLE AUTHOR PAGE
1 Characterization of Activated Carbon Prepared
From Low-Rank Coal of East Kalimantan By
Using Acid and Base Activation
Yuli Patmawati1, Alwathan2 dan
Nurkholis Hadi Ramadani3
1 - 5
2 Chemical Activation of Lignite by Using
a Combination of H3PO4- NaHCO3
Alwathan1, Muh.Irwan2, Panji
Satrio Utomo3 and Yuli
Patmawati4
7 - 11
3 Credit cards versus Debit cards are
viewed from a consumer's perspective
when shopping
Tetty Rimenda1 Elly Mirati2 13 - 19
4 Design of Microstrip E-shape Patch
Array Antenna Frequency 2,4 GHz for
Wireless CCTV Applications
Toto Supriyanto1*, Asolichat
Nurjanah2 and Teguh Firmansyah3
19 – 24
5 Analyzing The System Of “ Attitude” Applied
To The Motivational Expressions
Lenny Brida1) , M.R. Nababan2),
Riyadi Santosa3), Djatmika4)
25 - 35
6 Design Of Split AC Modification Become Air
Conditioning Of Geothermal Open System Widiyatmoko1, Fuad Zainuri1 ,
Abdul Azis Abdillah1, Imam
Wahyudi1 and Arifia Ekayuliana1
37 - 43
7 Analysis of Factors that Affect the
Performance of Companies listed on the
Indonesia Stock Exchange
Petrus Hari Kuncoro Seno1,
Ansori2 and Iwan Sugiwa3
45 - 52
8 Virtual Machine Utilization Study on
Computer Network Infrastructure Design
Defiana Arnaldy, Hata Maulana
53 - 61
9 Effect of Magnesium on Weld Quality
and Microstructure of Underwater Wet
Welding Joints
Dewin Purnama1,a, Seto
Tjahyono1
63 - 73
10 Analysis and Design of Management
Information Systems Department of
Informatics and Computer Engineering
Politeknik Negeri Jakarta
Mauldy Laya, Iklima Ermis Ismail 75 - 82
11 Development Of English Writing Skills of
FKPPI Rayon Cimanggis Members, Depok
Jawa Barat
Endang Purwaningrum1, Ina
Sukaesih2
83 - 85
12 Scien And Institutional Development Research
Online Based Entrepreneurship Motivation on
Women Entrepreneurs In Jabodetabek
Dr. Eva Zulfa, SE MM 87 - 91
13 Ufortunately Limited Ina Sukaesih1 Endang
Purwaningrum2 Septina
Indrayani3
93 - 97
14 Investigation of Grain Boundary Corrosion and
Crack on Stainless Steel A316 Processed by
EDM Die – Sinker for Food and Medicines
Dies and Punches
Muslimin1, Lishbet Engelita1,
Sonki Prasetya1, Pribadi
Mumpuni Adhi1 and Hasvienda
M. Ridlwan1
99 - 111
15 The Role Of External Auditors In Moderating
The Influence Of Family Ownership Towards
Tax Avoidance
Sabar Warsini1), and Titi
Suhartati2)
113 - 118
16 Venue attributes and destination image Etty Kongrat, Djuni Akbar, 119 - 124
vii
NO TITLE AUTHOR PAGE
influence satisfaction of Meeting Planners
in choosing destination
Annisa Wardhani Abstract
17 Design And Build Of Blood Clam (
Anadara Granosa ) Shells Pounding
Machine With Electric Movement
Motor
R. Agus Murdiyoto , Setiyadi 125 - 129
18 Design of Document Management
System for Program Study Accreditation
in Manado State Polytechnic
Muhammad K, Bakary,
SE.MSi1, Mariska Charlota
Walean, SE., M.Si, Deky
E.W Mundung, SE., MM
and DR. Ir. Efendy Rasjid,
M.Si., MM
131 - 136
19 Currency Denomination As Consumer Trigger
To Spend Money
Elly Mirati1Tetty Rimenda2 137 - 140
20 Dispute Resolution Between Business
Consumers And Consumers Through
Arbitration In The Consumer Protection
Perspective
Yuyut Prayuti
141 - 144
21 The Legal Impact Of Delaying Fiduciary
Security Registration in terms of Law Number
42 OF 1999 Concerning Fiduciary Security
And Regulation of The Minister Of Finance
Number 130 / PMK.010/2012
Elis Herlina
145 - 149
22 Performance Analysis Of Electric Vehicle
Powertrain System With Three Condotion
Angles
F.Zainuri 1,2, D. A. Sumarsono 1,
M. Adhitya 1, G. Fauzan 1, M.
Triananda 1,F.Arrafi 1, F.A.Falah 1
151 - 158
23 Modelling and Simulation CFD Analysis in
Runner for Cross Flow Turbine Type
Gun Gun R Gunadi1,a), Ahmad
Indra Siswantara2), Candra
Damis Widiawaty1),
Fachruddin1), Jusafwar1), Adi
Syuriadi1), Jauhari Ali1), and
Rosidi1)
159 - 169
1
Characterization of Activated Carbon Prepared From Low-Rank
Coal of East Kalimantan By Using Acid and Base Activation
Yuli Patmawati1, Alwathan2 dan Nurkholis Hadi Ramadani3 1,2,3Chemical Engineering Department, Politeknik Negeri Samarinda, Samarinda - Kalimantan Timur,
Indonesia
Abstract: Indonesia is one of the countries that has large coal reserves in the world, but its utilization
is still limited to the manufacture of briquettes and as fuel for electricity generation. Low
rank coal in Indonesia reached 28.4% of coal reserves, 67,198,300,021 tons/year of low-
rank coal production in East Kalimantan. On the one hand the results of the study indicate
that activated carbon can be made from organic and inorganic materials mentioned in high
carbon content. This article discusses the characteristics of activated carbon produced from
low rank coal of East Kalimantan by using acid and base activation with different activators
such as HCl, H3PO4 and NaOH. Low rank coal which has been prepared -100 +120 mesh is
carbonized at 6000C for 3 h, then after cold it was activated using 2.5 M concentration of
HCl, H3PO4 and NaOH for 8 h. Furthermore, an analysis of activated carbon refers to
Indonesian National Standard (SNI 06-3730-1995) was carried out including moisture
content, ash content, volatile matter, fixed carbon and iodine absorption number. The best
results were obtained by using HCl with activated carbon characteristics such as a moisture
content, ash content, volatile matter, fixed carbon and iodine absorption number
respectively as follows 5.23%, 11.72%, 8.85%, 74.2% and 660.40 mg/g.
1. Introduction
Coal was formed by the decomposition of plant matter, and it is a complex substance that can be found
in many forms. Coal is divided into four classes: lignite/low-rank coal, sub-bituminous, bituminous, and
anthracite. Low-rank coal in Indonesia reached 28.4% of coal reserves, 67,198,300,021 tons/year of low-
rank coal production in East Kalimantan.[1]
Activated carbon is mainly composed of carbonaceous material with various porous structures
and it is one of the mostly widely used adsorbents.This activated carbon has a specific affinity for non-
polar compounds, such as organics.[4] Activated carbon can be produced from different sources, such as
lignocellulosic materials, coal, bagasse ash, asphalt and oil, waste tyre rubber, activated sludge and
others.[10]Coal has the potential as a raw material to produce activated carbon because it has a high
carbon content.[11]
The production process of activated carbon mainly consists of three steps: dehydration,
carbonization, and activation. Dehydration is a drying process to remove moisture content from
the raw material. During carbonization, organics contained in the raw material are converted into
2
primary carbon, which is a mixture of amorphous, crystalline carbon, tar, and ash. Activation is
the main step in the whole process and is usually carried out in two ways: physical and chemical
activation.[4]Physical activation usually involves the carbonization of pre- cursor followed by the
gasification of the resulting char or direct CO2/steam activation of the starting material. Chemical
activation involves the impregnation of the given precursor with activation agent such as phosphoric
acid (H3PO4), chloric acid (HCl) , nitrit acid (HNO3) , zinc chloride (ZnCl2), and alkaline metal
compounds.[4]
The adsorption capacity of activated carbon is very important because this property determines how
much of the substance can be absorbed per gram of carbon.[1]The quality requirements for activated
carbon refers to Indonesian National Standard (SNI 06-3730-1995) with max.15% moisture content,
max.10% ash content, max.25% volatile matter, min.65% fixed carbon and min. 750 mg/g iodine
absorption number.[3]
Lots of research has been reported on the preparation of activated carbon from different sources
and on the effects of diferrent preparation condition on the characteristics of the activated carbon.
Research conducted by Maulana et.all (2017) “Activation Process of Candlenut Shell Use Different
Activators ( H3PO4, CaCl2, NaOH) a n d Concentration” The best result were obtained at 15%
concentration of NaOH, produce activated carbon with characteristics of moisture content, ash content,
volatile matter, fixed carbon and iodine absorption number respectively as follows 5.55%, 7.65%,
65.54%, 27.80% a n d 663.82 mg/g. Another study was making of activated carbon from sub-
bituminous coal with chemical activation using H3PO4 and combination of H3PO4- NH4HCO3 activators.
Sub-bituminous is carbonized at 600oC for 3 h, continued by chemical activation for 8 h and drying
process at 600oC for 2 h. The best result were obtained on the concentration H3PO4- NH4HCO3 2.5 M
with moisture content of 7.4%, ash content of 10%, volatile matter of 39.1%, fixed carbon of 43.5% and
iodine absorption number of 1238.544 mg/g.[6]
This article discusses the characteristics of activated carbon produced from low rank coal of East
Kalimantan by using acid and base activation with different activators such as HCl, H3PO4 and NaOH.
2. Methodology
Low rank coal which has been prepared -100 +120 mesh is carbonized at 6000C for 3 h, then after
cold it was activated using 2.5 M concentration of HCl, H3PO4 and NaOH for 8 h. Furthermore, an
analysis of activated carbon refers to Indonesian National Standard SNI 06-3730-1995 was carried out
including moisture content, ash content, volatile matter, fixed carbon and iodine absorption number.
Coal to be processed into activated carbon is determined by parameters of moisture content, ash content,
volatile matter, fixed carbon, iodine absorption number and calorific value respectively as follows
37.86%, 5.53%, 25.06%, 31.55%, 215.75 mg/g and 3665 cal/g.
3. Result and Discussion .
3
In Figure 1 can be seen that moisture content of low rank coal has decreased from 37.86% to 3.42 –
5.23%. The lowest moisture content produced by coal activated by H3PO4 is 3.42% while the highest
moisture content produced by coal activated by HCl is 5.23%. Acid activators cause complex damage to
oxygen during the activation process so that the moisture content in activated carbon is less than base
activators.[5] But it does not happen to HCl activators because the pH produced is so small that it requires
more water in the neutralization process. This causes activated carbon to absorb more water. Refers to
Indonesian National Standard (SNI 06-3730-1995), allowable moisture content of max. 15%.
The ash content of the activated carbon has increased from 5.53% to 11.72 – 13.64%. The increase in ash
content was due to the carbonization process at high temperatures cause the oxidation of most volatile
substances including carbon. Whereas ash is not oxidized because it is not a volatile substance. Based on
Figure 1, the use of acid activators produces lower ash content compared to alkaline/base activators. This is
because the acid activators of HCl and H3PO4 bind together with the alkaline elements in activated carbon
and form salts that dissolve easily in water. Conversely, the base activators such as NaOH, contain the
mineral element (sodium, Na) will be absorbed in the pores of activated carbon thereby increasing ash
content in activated carbon.[9] Based on Indonesian National Standard (SNI 06-3730-1995), allowable ash
content of max.10%.
The use of activators in the activation process is able to reduce component of non-carbon compounds
found on the surface of activated carbon and enlarge the surface pores of activated carbon.[8]Figure 1 shows
acid and base activators able to degrade organic matter that is present on the surface of carbon and also
release volatile materials. The lowest volatile matter produced by coal activated by HCl is 8.85% while the
highest volatile matter produced by coal activated by NaOH is 10.61%. Refers to Indonesian National
Standard (SNI 06-3730-1995), max.25% volatile matter is allowed.
The fixed carbon of low-rank coal was 31.55%, it has increased after the activation process to 71.08 –
74.2%. This can be seen in Figure 1. The increased in fixed carbon was due to decrease in moisture content
and volatile matter of activated carbon. Refers to Indonesian National Standard (SNI 06-3730-1995),
allowable fixed carbon of min. 65%.
4
The iodine adsorption number reflected the adsorption per- formance of activated carbon, as shown in
Figure 2. It tends to increase from 215.75 mg/g to 469.53 mg/g – 660.40 mg/g. The iodine absorption
number of H3PO4 and NaOH activators is lower than HCl because some of minerals element such as sodium
(Na) in NaOH is absorbed in the pores of activated carbon. It causes the micropore structure that has been
formed to be covered again by the Na element, thereby reducing the absorption capacity of activated carbon.
The highest iodine absorption number were obtained by using HCL activators was 660.40 mg/g. Refers to
Indonesian National Standard (SNI 06-3730-1995), allowable iodine adsorption number of min.750 mg/g.
The iodine absorption number of activated carbon in this research still below the standards referred to. This
is because the ash content in activated carbon is still high so it will close the surface of the activated carbon
pores.
4. Conclusion
1. Activation of low-rank coal of East Kalimantan was evaluated by taking different activators. The
best result were obtained by using HCl with activated carbon characteristics such as a moisture
content, ash content, volatile matter, fixed carbon and iodine absorption number respectively as
follows 5.23%, 11.72%, 8.85%, 74.2% and 660.40 mg/g.
2. Ash content and iodine absorption number still below the standards referred to Indonesian National
Standard (SNI 06-3730-1995).
References
[1] A.Demirbas, “Utilization of Coal as a Source of Chemical,” Energy Sources : Part A : Recovery,
Utilization, Environmental Effects (2007), Sila Science, Universite Mahallesi Trabzon, Turkey.
[2] Bilal Khalid et.al.,“Effects of KOH Activation on Surface Area, Porosity and Desalination
Performance of Coconut Carbon Electrodes,” Desalination and Water Treatment Journal 57 (2016)
2195–2202.
[3] Departemen Perindustrian dan Perdagangan, “Syarat Mutu dan Uji Arang Aktif SNI No. 06- 3730-
1995,”Balai Perindustrian dan Perdagangan, 2003.
[4] Dong-Su Kim, "Activated Carbon from Peach Stones Using Phosphoric Acid Activation at
Medium Temperatures," Journal of Environmental Science and Health Part A—
Toxic/Hazardous Substances & Environmental Engineering Vol. A39, No. 5, pp. 1301– 1318,
2004, Department of Environmental Science and Engineering, Ewha Womans University,
5
Korea
[5] Erawati dan Fernando, " Pengaruh Jenis Aktivator dan Ukuran Karbon Aktif Terhadap Pembuatan
Adsorbent dari Serbuk Gergaji kayu Sengon (Paraserianthes Falcataria)," Jurnal Integrasi Proses
Vol. 7: 58-66, 2018, Unversitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta.
[6] Kusdarini, E, Budianto, A dan Ghafarunnisa, “Produksi Karbon Aktif dari Batubara Bituminus dengan Aktivasi Tunggal H3PO4, Kombinasi H3PO4-NH4HCO3, dan Termal,” Jurnal Reaktor
UNDIP, 2017.
[7] Maulana, G.G.R., Agustina, L dan Susi, S, "Proses Aktivasi Arang Aktif dari Cangkang Kemiri
(Aleurites Moluccana) dengan Variasi Jenis dan Konsentrasi Aktivator Kimia," Universitas
Lambung Mangkurat, Teknik Industri Pertanian, 2017.
[8] Maulina, S dan Iriansyah, M, "Characteristics of Activated Carbon Resulted From Pyrolysis of
The Oil Palm Fronds Powder," Universitas Sumatra Utara, Teknik Kimia, 2018.
[9] Rahim, M dan Indriyani, O.S, "Pembuatan Karbon Aktif dari Batubara Peringkat Rendah,"
Jurnal Teknologi Media Perspektif, Hal. 40-44, 2010.
[10] Shawabkeh, R.A, Al-Harthi and Al-Ghamdi, “The Synthesis and Characterization of Microporous,
High Surface Area Activated Carbon from Palm Seeds,” Energy Sources, Part A, 36:93–103,
2014.
[11] Speight, J.G., “The Chemistry and Technology of Coal,” Marcel Dekker, Inc, New York, 1994.
6
7
Chemical Activation of Lignite by Using a Combination of H3PO4-
NaHCO3
Alwathan1, Muh.Irwan2, Panji Satrio Utomo3 and Yuli Patmawati4 1,2,3,4Chemical Engineering Department, Politeknik Negeri Samarinda, Samarinda - Kalimantan Timur,
Indonesia
Abstract. Coal is a mining product which is still abundant in Indonesia. Coal is divided into four classes:
lignite, sub-bituminous, bituminous, and anthracite. Lignite is a low rank coal. About 30% of
Indonesia's coal reserves are included in the low rank category. Despite their vast reserves,
low-rank coals are considered undesirable because their high moisture content entails
high transportation costs, potential safety hazards in transportation and storage, and the
low thermal efficiency obtained in combustion of such coals. The use of low-rank coal is still
limited for briquettes and as fuel for electricity generation. Coal has the potential as a raw
material to produce activated carbon because it has a high carbon content.[9]This article
discusses the chemical activation process of lignite use a combination of activator H3PO4 -
NaHCO3 to determine the effect of activation time on the characteristics of the activated
carbon produced. Lignite has been prepared -100 +120 mesh is carbonized at 6000C for 3 h,
then after cold it was activated using 2.5 M concentration of H3PO4-NaHCO3 for 2, 4, 6, 8 and
12 h. Furthermore, an analysis of activated carbon refers to Indonesian National Standard
(SNI 06-3730-1995) was carried out including moisture content, ash content, volatile matter,
fixed carbon and iodine absorption number. The best results were obtained at 6 h of
activation with the characteristics of activated carbon such as moisture content, ash
content, volatile matter, fixed carbon and iodine absorption number respectively as follows
3.5%, 14.91%, 9.81%, 71.78% and 505.07 mg/g. Even though the ash content and iodine
absorption number was still below the standards referred to Indonesian National Standard
(SNI 06-3730- 1995), but the activation of lignite by using a combination H3PO4-NaHCO3
activators have been increased iodine absorption number from 215.75 mg/g to 505.07 mg/g
1. Introduction
Coals are raw materials for many chemical syntheses as well as cost-effective fuels for power
plants due to their low cost; however, some coals such as low-rank coal (lignite) contain high
amounts of moisture.[4]
Activated carbon is a well known material that is used extensively in industrial purification and
chemical recovery operations. It offers an attractive and inexpensive option for removal of several solutes
from aqueous solutions. Activated carbon can be produced from different sources, such as lignocellulosic
materials, coal, baggase ash, activated sludge and others.[7]Coal has the potential as a raw material to
produce activated carbon because it has a high carbon content.[8]
8
Activation processes are mainly categorized into two categories for the preparation of activated
carbon i.e. physical and chemical activation. Physical activation usually involves the carbonization of pre-cursor followed by the gasification of the resulting char or direct CO2/steam activation of the starting
material. Chemical activation involves the impregnation of the given precursor with activation agent such as phosphoric acid (H3PO4), c h l o r i c a c i d ( H C l ) , n i t r i t a c i d ( H N O 3 ) , zinc chloride (ZnCl2),
alkaline metal compounds and salt.
The adsorption capacity of activated carbon is very important because this property determines how
much of the substance can be absorbed per gram of carbon. The activator type directly affects the micropore
structure, specific surface area and pore volume of the activated carbon, which makes its adsorption capacity
vary obviously.[ 1 ] Activated carbon is sold at a high enough price if the adsorption capacity is large. The
quality requirements for activated carbon refers to Indonesian National Standard (SNI 06-3730-1995) with
max.15% moisture content, max.10% ash content, max.25% volatile matter, min.65% fixed carbon and min.
750 mg/g iodine absorption number.[3]
Many studies regarding the change in adsorption capacity of activated carbon as a function of
the type of chemicals and activating conditions have been reported. Research conducted by Rahim and
Indriyani using 5% NaOH activator solution produced activated carbon according to SII standard 0258-79
even though the ash content was still above the standard.[6] Another study was making of activated carbon
from sengon wood with chemical activation using NH4HCO3 activator solution of concentration variation 0;
0.5; 1; 3; 5 and 10% by weight, produce activated carbon with moisture content of 6.39%, ash content of
9.15%, volatile matter of 8.81%, fixed carbon of 82.04% and iodine absorption number of 1154.4 mg/gr.
Meanwhile research with chemical activation of bituminous coal[5] used a combination of H3PO4 -
NH4HCO3 activator solution (concentration 2 M - 2.5 M) for 8 h followed by physical activation to produce
activated carbon with a moisture content of 7.5%, ash content of 9%, volatile matter of 43.3%, fixed carbon
of 40.2% and increased iodine absorption number to 1172.56 - 1238.544 mg/gr.[5]
This article discusses the chemical activation process use a combination of activator H3PO4 - NaHCO3
as well as Kusdarini, et al. but using different combination activators and raw materials namely lignite coal
and also without physical activation to determine the effect of activation time on the characteristics of the
activated carbon produced.
2. Methodology
Lignite has been prepared -100 +120 mesh is carbonized at 6000C for 3 h, then after cold it was activated
using 2.5 M concentration of H3PO4-NaHCO3 for 2, 4, 6, 8 and 12 h. Furthermore, an analysis of activated
carbon refers to Indonesian National Standard SNI 06-3730-1995 was carried out including moisture
content, ash content, volatile matter, fixed carbon and iodine absorption number. Table 1 summerizes the
characterization of lignite before activation.
Table 1. Characteristics of Lignite
Parameter Value
Moisture Content, % 37.86
Ash Content, % 5.53
Volatile Matter, % 25.06
Fixed Carbon, % 31.55
Iodine Number, mg/g 215.75
Caloric Value, cal/g 3665
9
3. Result and Discussion
Table 2 summarizes the results of chemical activation of lignite by using a combination of H3PO4 -
NaHCO3 activators.
Table 2. Characteristics of Activated Carbon
Time, hours Parameter
2 4 6 8 12
Moisture Content, % 5.15 3.89 3.5 3.83 3.62
Ash Content, % 11.07 13.98 14.91 13.89 13.85
Volatile Matter, % 10.36 9.71 9.81 12.03 10.08
Fixed Carbon, % 73.42 72.42 71.78 70.25 72.45
Iodine Number, mg/g 479.18 492.12 505.07 492.12 453.28
The effect of activation time on characteristics of activated carbon is represented in Figure 1 and 2.
Figure 1. Characteristics of Activated Carbon versus Time of Activation
Moisture content - the amount of water released when a coal sample is heated at prescribed conditions.[2]From
Figure 1 can be seen that the longer time of activation, the moisture content has decreased from 37.86% to 3.5%
at 6 h of activation time. This is because water trapped into the cavity of activated carbon will be more
dehydrated by combination of activator H3PO4 - NaHCO3. The increase in moisture content at 8 h and 12 h of
activation time was due to the hygroscopic characteristic of the activated carbon so that in the cooling process
water vapor in the air is absorbed into the pores.
Ash Content - inorganic residue remaining after a coal sample fully burned. It is generally composed of
compounds of SiO2, Al, Fe, Ca, Mg, and others. The ash may change from the mineral matter present in the coal
before being burned. It represents the bulk of the mineral matter in the coal after losing the volatile components
such as CO2, SO2, and H2O. The ash content was measured to be 11.07% ; 13.98% ; 14.91% ; 13.89% and
13.85% at 2, 4, 6, 8 and 12 h of activation time, respectively. The increase in ash content until 6 h of
activation time was due to the presence of alkali elements which are absorbed in the low-rank coal pore
during immersion with an activator H3PO4 - NaHCO3 to form a silicate from the alkali elements. After showing
its highest value at 6 h activation time, the ash content gradually decreased with activation time and was
13.85% at 12 h of activation.
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
Moisture Content
Ash Content
Volatile Matter
Fixed Carbon
0 5 10 15
Time, hours
Pe
rce
nta
ge, %
10
Volatile matter - the portion of coal that is released as gases and volatile liquids when heated in the absence of
air at prescribed conditions.[10] The decrease in volatile matter from 25.06% until 10.36% at 2 h of activation
time but the longer time of activation (2 h – 6 h) of low- rank coal does not have a significant effect on volatile
matter. At 8 h activation, the volatile matter has increased because the decomposition of H2CO3 into H2O and
CO2. After 8 h activation, the volatile matter decreased and was 10.08% at 12 h of activation.
Fixed carbon - the remaining organic material after the volatile matter and moisture have been released from
the coal sample. Fixed carbon is composed of carbon with lesser amounts of H, N, and
S. It is generally described as a coke-like residue. It can be used to give a forecast of heating value of the coal.[9]
Activation of lignite by using combination of H3PO4 - NaHCO3 activators has succeeded in increasing the fixed
carbon from 31.55% to 70.25% -73.42%. The increase in fixed carbon was due to decrease in moisture content
and volatile matter, while the ash content does not contribute too much.
Figure 2. Iodine Absorption Number of Activated Carbon versus Time of Activation
The iodine adsorption number reflected the adsorption per- formance of activated carbon, as shown in Figure
2. It tends to increase from 215.75 mg/g to 505.07 mg/g at 6 h of activation time. Furthermore at 8 and 12 h of
activation time there was decrease until finally obtained an iodine absorption number of 453.28 mg/g. In
general, the iodine absorption number of activated carbon, which represents its adsorption capacity. When
activation was carried out longer than 6 h the decrease in iodine absorption number probably due to higher ash
content so that inorganic substances left on the activated carbon cover the pores of the activated carbo
4. Conclusion
1. Chemical activation of lignite by us i ng a combination of H3PO4 - NaHCO3 activators was evaluated
taking activation time as the major influential parameters were obtained the best condition at 6 h of
activation time with the characteristics of activated carbon such as moisture content, ash content, volatile
matter, fixed carbon and iodine absorption number respectively as follows 3.5%, 14.91%, 9.81%, 71.78%
and 505.07 mg/g.
2. Ash content and iodine absorption number was still below the standards referred to Indonesian National
Standard (SNI 06-3730-1995)
References
[1] Bilal Khalid et.al., “Effects of KOH Activation on Surface Area, Porosity and Desalination Performance of
Coconut Carbon Electrodes,” Desalination and Water Treatment Journal 57 (2016) 2195–2202
600
50
0
40
0
30
0
20
0
10
0
0
0 5 10 15 Time, hours
Iod
ine
Ab
sorp
tio
n N
um
be
r, m
g/g
11
[2] Bilgen, S., “The effects of Chemical Characteristics of Coal on Coal- Based Industry,” Energy Sources,
Part A: Recovery, Utilization, and Environmental Effects, 38:22, 3324-3331, 2016.
[3] Departemen Perindustrian dan Perdagangan, “Syarat Mutu dan Uji Arang Aktif SNI No. 06-3730- 1995,”
Balai Perindustrian dan Perdagangan, 2003.
[4] Karthikeyan, M ; Zhonghua, W and Mujumdar, S.Arun, “Low-Rank Coal Drying Technologies—Current
Status and New Developments,” Drying Technology: An International Journal, 2009.
[5] Kusdarini, E ; Budianto, A dan Ghafarunnisa, “Produksi Karbon Aktif dari Batubara Bituminus dengan
Aktivasi Tunggal H3PO4, Kombinasi H3PO4-NH4HCO3, dan Termal,” Jurnal Reaktor UNDIP, 2017.
[6] Rahim, M dan Indriyani, O., “Pembuatan Karbon Aktif dari Batubara Peringkat Rendah,” Jurnal Teknologi
Media Perspektif, Politeknik Negeri Samarinda, 2010.
[7] Shawabkeh, R.A ; Al-Harthi and Al-Ghamdi, “The Synthesis and Characterization of Microporous, High
Surface Area Activated Carbon from Palm Seeds,” Energy Sources, Part A, 36:93–103, 2014.
[8] Speight, J.G., “The Chemistry and Technology of Coal,” Marcel Dekker, Inc, New York, 1994.
[9] Speight, J. G., “Coal-Fired Power Generation Handbook,” Beverly, USA: Scrivener Publishing, 2013a.
12
13
Credit cards versus Debit cards are viewed from a consumer's perspective when shopping
Tetty Rimenda1 Elly Mirati2@ Politeknik Negeri Jakarta
1Accounting Department, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta
[email protected], [email protected] 2Accounting Department, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta
ABSTRACT
The phenomenon that consumers often shop for items unplanned, despite the sudden urge, even though
he does not need these items. According to the shooping momentum effect theory, consumers are
encouraged to spend their money due to many factors, one of which is because consumers do not feel the
pain of spending money, because the payment method does not involve physical money. The purpose of
this study is to compare consumers' buying interest if payment is made by credit card compared to
payment using a debit card. Data collection was carried out by the experimental method, where
participants were grouped into the credit card group and the debit card group. Data processing is done by
t-test. His results concluded that there were differences in consumer interest in buying when payments
were made by credit card compared to debit cards. Average shopping interest with a credit card M (1) =
4.2794> M (2) = 2.6765. It can be concluded that the desire of consumers to spend their money using a
credit card is greater than if the payment was made with a debitt card. The results of this study can
provide input to the bank, that the use of credit cards makes consumers more motivated to shop, so that
credit card promotions can be made even better.
Key words : credit card, debit card, experiment, shopping momentum theory
1. Introduction
Very often when consumers walk to shopping centers, at first they don't plan to shop, they just
want to relax, walk around or just look around. But eventually they go home with a lot of
groceries, which they sometimes don't need. Consumers are often tempted to spend money outside
of their plans. The temptation can be triggered by various things. According to [1], consumers'
decisions that violate their intention not to shop, then turn to shopping can be a trigger for
shopping for other goods. This condition is called shopping momentum (The Shopping
Momentum Effect).
The idea of shopping momentum arises from the mental barriers of consumers to change search
(browsing) into spending. When these obstacles can be overcome, the shopping process becomes
easier. Based on mind-set theory deliberative thinking prevents consumers from making
decisions, because consumers still think about the advantages and disadvantages of their
decisions. Whereas Implementation thinking has the aim to take action so that decision making
can be immediately carried out. The transfer of mind- sets from deliberative to implementation
can lead to shopping momentum.
Research [1] found important findings, that shopping momentum can be prevented if money for
shopping is separated. This finding becomes a very significant thing, because marketers have
14
struggled to create spending momentum, but can be stopped because of the payment methods
used. Is it just a separate source of money that can stop shopping momentum? What about the
payment method? like credit cards and debit cards? Considering credit cards and credit cards have
become a payment instrument commonly used by consumers. Even now these two payment
methods have become substitutes for cash payments. The researcher aims to explore the use of
credit and debit cards that are associated with shopping momentum.
The use of credit cards as a means of payment is not new. Research shows consumers tend to shop
more when using credit cards rather than cash (Raghubir & Srivastava 2008). Whereas [3] found
credit cards indirectly influence consumers to behave impulsively in shopping for hedonic goods.
Furthermore [4] prove that the pain of paying with cash can limit consumers to shop for items that
are not healthy, but if payment is made by credit card, the pain can be eliminated. This finding is
in accordance with mental accounting theory, where consumers tend to classify their income
based on different intended uses debit cards are a form of payment using plastic money. The debit
card is connected to the savings account holder, if the owner purchases using a debit card, the
account will automatically be cut off. A debit card is different from a credit card. Credit cards
allow the user to pay after a certain time. Thus, the debit card only functions as a payment
instrument that is the same as cash, the difference is the user does not need to carry money
physically, so it is safer and more comfortable.
Research [5] found that the use of debit cards was more controlled because consumers were more
careful in using it. Furthermore [5] said there is no relationship between the use of debit cards
with increasing consumer debt. This condition can be explained by the double-entry mental
accounting theory, when making payments using a debit card causes pain to consumers, because
consumers are aware that their savings at that time are also debited. This condition makes
consumers more careful in using debit cards. Conversely the use of credit cards, does not cause
pain when making payments, but new pain arises when consumers have to pay the installments.
So that when shopping using a credit card, consumers are often not controlled.
The purpose of this research is to examine the effect of credit card use on shopping momentum.
Previous research has shown that credit cards increase spending on hedonic goods. Does a credit
card also generate shopping momentum? so that in the end will trigger spending utilitarian goods?
Next will be tested also whether the use of a debit card can cause shopping momentum.
Considering consumers tend to be more careful in using debit cards
2. Methodology
2.1.Hypothesis
Bringing cash at this time is insecure and uncomfortable, so consumers switch from paying in
cash and using a credit or debit card. Credit cards are loans by banks with certain ceilings that can
be used at any time. Credit card payments can be in installments or pay in full. Because credit
cards can be paid in installments, consumers prefer to pay using credit cards rather than cash
(Humprey, 2004). In addition [3] prove that credit cards indirectly influence consumers to shop
impulsively. So thus the hypothesis proposed is:
H1: When consumers make payments using a credit card, the expenditure will be greater
than if the payment was made using a debit card
Direct debit card payment will cut the customer's account, so that every time a transaction the
consumer savings is immediately reduced. In principle, a debit card is the same as cash, because
when consumers use a debit card, the account is directly debited by the bank. The difference is
15
that consumers do not need to carry cash. Because consumers realize that their accounts are
directly reduced, consumers are more careful about using debit cards. (Lee, Rahman & Kim,
2007) So the proposed hypothesis is:
H2: When a consumer makes a payment using a debit card, the expenditure will be
smaller than if the first payment was made in cash.
2.2.Methodology Experiment
The research method that will be used is the experimental method. Data collection will be done at
the time of the experiment. The number of participants needed is as many as 40 people. Each
group will consist of ± 20 respondents. Determination of the number of respondents refers to [6]
which says the number of respondents should be for each group ranging from 20-50 people /
group.
To determine the key driver product and the target product, a pilot study will be conducted which
is to choose 3 products based on their benefits (key chain, card wallet and nail clippers), card
wallet is chosen as the key driver. The amount of money to be spent is IDR 100,000, referring to
the fact that retailers allow payments to be made with a credit card if the total spend is at least
IDR 100,000. So the price of product A and B will also be adjusted to that price.
Figure 1 : The experimental procedure
3. Result and Discussion
Data processing uses independent sample t test, to find out whether there is a difference in
consumers' desire to spend their money when using a credit card compared to using a debit card.
From the levene's test, the F value (6.976) p = 0.010. Because p <0.05, it can be concluded that
there is a difference between consumers' desire to spend their money when using different
payment methods
T-test Group Statistic
Method N Mean Std.
Deviation
Std. Error
Mean
WTP 1.00 34 4.2794 .37822 .06486
2.00 34 2.6765 .64117 .10996
Payment methods using credit cards = 1, payment methods using debit cards = 2. From the table
above it appears that M (1) = 4.2794> M (2) = 2.6765. It can be concluded that the desire of
consumers to spend their money using a credit card is greater than if the payment was made with
a credit card.
The results of this study concluded that there was a difference between paying using a credit card
16
compared to using a debit card. This finding is in accordance with the theory of mental
accounting, which says that consumers will distinguish between the money received or the money
they spend, depending on the use of the money. Consumers feel more disadvantaged using a debit
card, because they realize that the money will be deducted at that time, whereas if payment is
made using a credit card, then the pain can be postponed, because the payment is made not at the
time the expenditure is made. Even credit card payments can be made in installments
The results of this study also accept Hypothesis 1, where it is suspected that consumers are more
willing to spend their money using a credit card than using a debit card. Actually a debit card is
the same as cash, only with a debit card, consumers do not need to carry cash.
To prove hypothesis 2, a paired sample test is used, where debit payments will be paired with cash
payments. From the paired sample test results, the results obtained significance of 0.633> 0,000,
concluded that there is no difference between consumers who want to spend their money using a
debit card or cash. Thus Hypothesis 2 is rejected
Paired Sample Test
Mean Std.
Deviation
Std. Error
Mean
t
df Sig. (2-
tailed)
CASH -
DEBIT .09559 1.15800 .19860 .481 33
.633
4. Conclution
This research can prove that differences in payment methods when buying key drivers can affect
shopping momentum. The use of credit cards can increase consumer interest in spending even
though goods purchased are based on benefits (utilarian), because shopping momentum changes
the way consumers think from deliberative to implementative. While the use of debit cards does
not derail the shopping momentum, even though consumers feel pain when making payments.
This is because the products purchased are very beneficial for consumers, so consumers want to
enjoy the products they buy at the moment without being bothered with the pain of having to pay
in the future. The results of this study are expected to strengthen the theory of shopping
momentum (The Shopping Momentum Effect)
Limitation of this study is the participant. Because the participants are students, a very prominent
limitation is the ownership of credit and debit cards. There are still few students who have credit
cards independently, the majority of credit cards they have are supplementary cards whose bills
are paid by their parents. Debit cards have more ownership, but their savings balance is still
limited.
The results of this study can be used to create shopping momentum. If it is proven that a credit
card can generate shopping momentum, the manager can offer credit card payments, and even
offer a 0% interest program. Similarly, if the credit card does not derail the shopping momentum,
then the manager can create advertisements that stimulate consumers to use a debit card when
shopping.
References :
[1]. Dhar Ravi, Huber Joel, Khan Uzma (2007) : “The Shopping Momentum Effect”, Journal of
Marketing Research Vol XLIV, 370 – 378
[3]. Park, Hye Jung & Burn, Leslie Davis (2005) “ Fashion Orientation, Credit card Use and
17
Compulsive Buying”, Journal of Consumer Marketing, 22/3, 135-141.
[4]. Thomas Manoj, Desai KK & Seenivasan S (2010) : “How Credit Card Payment Increase
Unhealthy Food Purchase:Visceral Regulation of Vices, Journal of Consumer Research , Vol 38
[5]. Lee Jinkook, Abdul-Rahman Fahzy, Kim Hyungsoo (2007) “Debit Card Usage : an examination
of its impact on household debt”, Financial Service Review, 16, 73-87
[6] Aaker David, Day George S, Kumar V (2001) “Marketing Research”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc,
NewYork.
[7]. Dhar Ravi, Wertenbroch Klaus (2000) “ Consumer Choice Between Hedonic and Utilitarian
Goods” Journal of Marketing Research Vol XXXVII, 60 - 71
18
19
Design of Microstrip E-shape Patch Array Antenna Frequency 2,4
GHz for Wireless CCTV Applications
Toto Supriyanto1*, Asolichat Nurjanah2 and Teguh Firmansyah3 1Department of Electrical Engineering. Politeknik Negeri Jakarta (PNJ). 2Department of Electrical Engineering. Politeknik Negeri Jakarta (PNJ).
3Department of Electrical Engineering. Universitas Sultan Ageng Tirtayasa. *Corresponding Author: [email protected]
ABSTRACT
In order to extend the coverage area of wireless closed circuit television (CCTV)
network. This paper was proposed Microstrip E-shape Patch Array Antenna (MEPA) for
Wireless CCTV applications. These antenna has a center frequency of 2,4 GHz. The
design was simulated by computer studio suite (CST) and was fabricated on double layer
FR4 substrate with Er = 4.4 and h
= 1.6 mm. The design of MEPA antenna consists of three element patch with E-shaped,
which is constructed horizontally. The measurement results show that antenna has good
performance with a center frequency of 2,414 GHz, return-loss of -30.256 dB, bandwidth
of 56,25 MHz, VSWR of 1.125, half power beamwidth (HPBW) 70 , and gain of 4,33
dB.
Keywords: Antenna, Array, E-shaped, Wireless CCTV.
1. INTRODUCTION
Communication without using cable is called wireless communication [1][2]. One of tools to
communicate without cable is audio video (AV) wireless transceiver. The function of AV wireless
transceiver is to help wireless communication in CCTV network. The issue about crime become
attention therefore it needs security improvement. CCTV is one security and control system which
uses camera as input and television as the output. At AV wireless transceiver has attached antenna
which is dipole antenna. The dipole antenna can transmit video in coverage area of 10-20 meter
[2][3]. Therefore dipole antenna will be replaced with the micro strip antenna of which the coverage
area is farther than dipole antenna, and to decrease noise, filter should be added [4-6]
2. THREE ELEMEN E-SHAPE PATCH LINIER ARRAY MICROSTRIP ANTENNA
Antenna is a device that serves to move the electromagnetic wave energy from cable to air or
vice versa. E-shape micro strip antenna is antenna which has patch shape like an E letter. Three Elemen
E-Shape Patch Linier Array micro strip antenna can be seen on Figure 1.
Figure 1. Three Elemen E-Shape Patch Linier Array micro strip antenna
To determine the width from radiating element of Three Elemen E-Shape Patch Linier Array
micro strip antenna equation 1can be used [2][3].
20
hence : W = Radiating element width (mm) f = Working Frequency of the antenna (Hz)
휀𝑟 = Permittivity dielectric relative substrate c = ray speed in free space (3x108 m/s)
The equipment made is antenna MEPA linier 3 element. This antenna can work on the network of
CCTV with the frequency of 2,414 GHz and be used as receiver antenna in receiver AV wireless
ware. The working method of this equipment is by receiving video by using 3-element MEPA
antenna linear which works at the frequency of 2,414 GHz. Blog diagram of working system of the
equipment can be seen on Figure 2.
Figure 2. Working system of the equipment
Figure 2 shows block diagram of equipment working method. There is frequency shifting from
2,4 GHz to 2,414 GHz. This is due to the AV wireless transceiver equipment does not have frequency
channel at exactly 2,4 GHz, therefore it is used the frequency channel which close to 2,4 GHz, which
is 2,414 GHz. Further, 3 elements linear MEPA antenna is connected to the receiver AV wireless
ware which directly connect to television as the output. The video signal is received, transmitted by
the antenna micro strip of triangular patch linier array 3 element used as transmitter which works at
the same frequency of 2,414 GHz. AV transmitter wireless ware is connected to camera. The camera
is used as input of video recording.
21
2.1 Antenna specification
Figure 3 shows the result of realization of microstrip antenna 3- element E-Shape linear patch array.
Figure 3. E-Shape micro strip antenna
The designed antenna has specification as explained on Table 1.
Table 1. Specification of 3-element MEPA linier antenna
Parameters information
Working frequency 2,414 GHz
Return Loss <-10 dB
VSWR <2
Radiation pattern Unidirectional
Gain >3dB
Bandwidth 36 MHz
Software CST studio suite 2016
Antenna testing includes three stages, namely testing near field parameters, far field parameters, and application
testing. Near field testing includes work frequency, return loss, VSWR, and bandwidth.
3. RESULT AND DISCUSSION The comparison graph between the return loss of the test and the simulation can be seen in Figure 4
Figure 4. Comparison return loss testing with simulation
22
Figure 4 shows the return loss is at a frequency of 2.414 GHz ,. Based on the
simulation results it was obtained the return loss value as -39.83422 dB, whereas the test
return loss value was only -30.256 dB. Comparison between VSWR simulation with test can
be seen in Figure 5.
Figure 5. Comparison of VSWR simulation by testing
Figure 5 shows the VSWR value. At the time of simulation, the value of VSWR generated
was 1.0205953. When the test is conducted it was obtained VSWR value as 1.125. The
comparison between the simulated bandwidth and the test can be seen in Table 2.
Table 2. Bandwidth comparison simulation by testing
Result Frequency (GHz) Bandwidth (MHz)
Simulation 2,414 78
Testing 2,414 56,25
At simulation bandwidth of 78 MHz. At the time of testing was obtained banwidth of 56.25
MHz. Far field tests include radiation and gain patterns. The radiation pattern of the simulation
results can be seen in Figure 6.
(a) (b)
Figure 6. a) Results of the simulated radiation pattern, b) Result of measured radiation
pattern
Figure 6. shows the radiation pattern obtained that is unidirectional radiation pattern both in simulation
and testing. The comparison results of antenna gain of simulation and by the test can be seen in Table 3.
Table 3 Comparison of simulated gain values with testing
Parameters Simulation Testing
frequency (GHz) 2,414 2,414
Gain (dB) 4,741 4,33
23
Table 3 shows the antenna gain of 4.76 dB in the simulation and 4.33 dB in the test.
Antenna application testing includes strong antenna signal measurement and image quality
from CCTV. In Table 4we can see the results of image quality testing between micro strip
antennas with antenna innate dipole indoors.
Table 4. Results of image quality testing between micro strip antenna with antenna innate
dipole indoors
Distance
(m)
Micros trip antenna
as Tx and Rx
Micros trip antenna
as Tx and Rx
MOS PSNR (dB) Sinyal (dBm)
MOS PSNR (dB)
Sinyal (dBm)
10 4,92 (good) 60,849 (very good) -22,1 4,8 (good) 59,4299 (good) -24,3
20 4,84 (good) 56,383 (good) -23,2 4,6 (good) 49,1186 (fairly good) -24,6
30 4,84 (good) 52,760 (good) -23,6 4,52 (good) 46,7682 (fairly good) -25,3
40 - 46,690 (fairly good) -31,7 - 46,4831 (fairly good) -33,2
Table 4 shows the test results data in the room. When using a micro strip antenna as Tx
and Rx, based on the MOS method, the image quality is good at a distance of 10-30 m.
Assessment using the PSNR method, the image quality at a distance of 10m has a very good
value of 60.849dBm, distances of 20 and 30 m each have a value of 56.383 dBm and 52.76
dBm. At a distance of 40m has a better value with a value of 46.69 dBm. Strong signals at a
distance of 10, 20, 30, 40 m at -22.1 dBm, -23.2 dBm, -23.6 dBm, and -31.7 dBm.
When using dipole antenna as Tx and Rx, based on MOS method the image quality is
good at 10-30 m distance. Assessment using PSNR method of image quality both at a distance
of 10 m with a value of 59.4299 dBm, and quite good at a distance of 20-40 m with a value of
49.1186 dBm, 46.7682 dBm, and 46.4831 dBm. Strong signals at a distance of 10, 20, 30, 40
m at -24.3 dBm, -24.6 dBm, -25.3 dBm, and -33.2 dBm. The more distances between
antennas, the weaker the signal strength and the worse the quality of the resulting image. The
results of image quality testing between microstrip antenna and antenna inbuilt outdoor dipole
can be seen in Table 5.
Table 5 Image quality testing result between a micros trip antenna and a built-in dipole antenna
outside the room
distance (m)
Micros trip antenna
as Tx and Rx
Micros trip antenna
as Tx and Rx
MOS PSNR
(dB)
Signal strength
(dBm) MOS
PSNR
(dB)
Signal strength
(dBm)
10 4,96 (good)
58,224 (good)
-25,8 4,84 (good)
56,827 (good)
-34,5
20 4,96 (good)
57,440 (good)
-27,4 4,6 (good)
54,737 (good)
-34,6
30 4,76 (good)
56,837 (good)
-31,5 4,12 (good)
46,483 (fairly good)
-36,1
40 4,4
(good)
46,497
(fairly
good)
-34,2
3,6
(fairly
good)
43,091
(fairly good)
-37,7
50 4,2
(good)
43,429
(fairly
good)
-34,4
3,4
(fairly
good)
40,320 (fairly
good)
-38,6
60 4,04
(good)
40,753
(fairly
good)
-34,8
3,32
(fairly
good)
31,204
(bad)
-41,9
70
3,88
(fairly
good)
40,361
(fairly
good)
-35,9
3,04
(fairly
good)
13,338
(very bad)
-44,0
24
80
3,48
(fairly good)
38,891
(bad)
-36,6 2,64
(fairly)
13,092
(very bad)
-45,3
90
3,24
(fairly
good)
38,1270
(bad)
-37,3 2,32
(bad)
12,9807
(Sangat bad)
-47,5
100
3,08
(fairly
good)
37,9850
(bad)
-38,6 1,6
(very bad)
12,9146
(very bad)
-49,0
Table 5 shows the result of testing outside of the room. When using microsrip antenna as
Tx and Rx., based on MOS method the quality of the image up to the distance of 10-60m was
good and 70-100m is fairly good. The result by using PSNR the quality of image is good at the
distance of 10-30 m, fairly good at the distance of 40-70m, and bad at the distance of 80-
100m. The farther the distance the weaker the signal strength would be.
When using dipole antenna as Tx and Rx, based on MOS method of image quality was good
up to the distance of 10-30 m, fairly good at the distance of 40-70 m, at the distance of80-90 m
was bad, and very bad at the distance of distance 100 m. Assessment using PSNR method of
image quality was good at the distance of 10-20 m, fairly good at the distance 30-50 m, bad at
the distance of 60 m, and very bad at the distance of 70-100 m. Strong signal from a distance of
10-100 m the same as the micro strip antenna, the farther the distance the weaker the signal
strength would be.
4. CONCLUSION The conclusions are as follows:
1. From the simulation result at working frequency of 2,414 GHz it was obtain the return loss
value as - 39,83422 dB, VSWR as 1,0205953, and gain as 4,741 dB.
2. From the test results at the working frequency of 2.414 GHz it was obtained return loss value of
-30.256 dB, VSWR of 1.125, and the gain of 4.33 dB.
3. 3-element linear MEPA antenna has unidirectional polarized form of simulation and test results.
4. The MOS value is considered excellent with a value of 5, either with a value of 4, good
enough with a value of 3, bad with a value of 2, and very bad with a value of 1.
5. The PSNR value is considered to be excellent with a value of 60 dB, good with a value of 50
dB, good enough with a value of 40 dB, bad with a value of 30 dB, and very bad with a value
of <20 dB.
6. The further the antenna testing distance the weaker the signal level would be, both when using
a micro strip antenna and dipole as Tx and Rx.
References [1] Alaydrus, Mudrik.2011. Antena Prinsip dan Aplikasi. Yogyakarta: Graha Ilmu.
[2] Balanis, Constantine A. 1982. Antenna Theory: Analysis and Design (2th Ed.). John Willey and Sons,
Inc.
[3] Balanis, Constantine A. 2016. Antenna Theory: Analysis and Design (4th Ed.). John Willey and Sons,
Inc.
[4] T Firmansyah, et al. "Dual‐wideband band pass filter using folded cross‐stub stepped
impedance resonator". Microwave and Optical Technology Letters 59 (11), 2929-2934. 2017.
[5] T Firmansyah, S Praptodiyono, AS Pramudyo, C Chairunissa, M Alaydrus. "Hepta-band bandpass
filter based on folded cross-loaded stepped impedance resonator". Electronics Letters 53 (16),
1119-1121. 2017.
[6] T Firmansyah, R Wiryadinata, MI Santoso, YR Denny, T Supriyanto. "Bandwidth and Gain
Enhancement of MIMO Antenna by Using Ring and Circular Parasitic with Air-Gap Microstrip
Structure". Telkomnika 15 (3), 1155-1163. 2017.
[7] Fischer, Walter. 2010. Digital Video and Audio Broadcasting Technology (3rd ed.). New York :
Springer.
[8] Priyoyudo, Ady. 2006. “Technique of Proof Ownership of Digital Image with Watermarking on
Domain Wavelet”. Semarang : UNDIP.
25
ANALYZING THE SYSTEM OF “ATTITUDE” APPLIED
TO THE MOTIVATIONAL EXPRESSIONS Lenny Brida1) , M.R. Nababan2), Riyadi Santosa3), Djatmika4)
Postgraduate Program
Sebelas Maret University (UNS) Surakarta, Indonesia.
ABSTRACT The purposes of these research are: (a) to analyze the system of Attitudes which are applied to
motivational expressions (b) to identify the dominant Attitude system used in the motivational expressions
by using three sub-systems; Affect, Judgment and Appreciation (c) to analyze the characteristics of
motivational Phrases used in the motivational expression.
This attitude system and motivational expression is worth investigating because in every aspects of
our life, we always produce and receive motivational expressions, in order to drive people around us, such
as our students, our children, our spouse, and our colleagues, etc. Therefore, the result of this research will
be a valuable contribution to lecturers, teachers, managers, or leaders to produce a highly motivational
expressions.
The main Source of data for this study is the motivational Expressions from the Book of “The 7
Habits of Highly Effective People”, written by Stephen R. Covey. This book is chosen due to its quality as
one of the international best seller books and as an inspiring book in improving and motivating personal
effectiveness.
From a number of Journals that the writer have read, It has been investigated about “ motivation”
but not many researchers evaluate them from the perspective of appraisal devices, especially from the
Attitude system; a central element of the Appraisal devices, consists of three categories: Affect, Judgment
and Appreciation (Martin and Rose, 2007). Affect refers to language resources for expressing emotions.
Judgment consists of language resources for evaluating people’s behaviors. Appreciation deals with the
evaluation of ‘things’.
This research applied a descriptive qualitative method and the data were obtained through
purposive sampling and analyzed with a content analysis technique by referring to indicators of
motivational devices and Attitude system..
From 946 data of motivational expression, It is found that the motivational expressions contain
three types of attitude;they are Judgment (425:44,9%) Appreciation (351:37,1%), and Affect (170:18%).
The dominant type of affect consist of Inclination desire, surge (33 : 67,3%), the dominant type of
judgment is Positive Capacity ( 230 : 53,9%), and Positive Propriety Ethics (60 :14,1%), while the
dominant type of Appreciation is Positive valuation (180:51%).
From the findings of the dominant types of attitude system, it could be concluded that motivational
expressions and Attitude are intertwined and closely connected.
Key Words : Attitude System, Affect, Judgment, Appreciation, and Motivational expression
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background of The Study
1. The concept of Attitudes as a component of Appraisal system helps us understand and explain
“interpersonal meaning” in a communication, such as a writer to the reader or the speaker to the
listener. Attitudes have to do with evaluating things, people’s character and their feeling (Martin
and Rose, 2007). Although some researchers have analyzed about attitude system of Appraisal in
relation to negotiating meaning, yet not much has connected attitudes to the motivational
expression. In fact, in every day of human life, people need motivation not only for achievement
but also how to move us from boredom to interest. Motivation is sometimes likened to the engine
and steering wheel of an automobile. Energy and direction are the center of the concept of
motivation (Gage and Berliner, 2004:326).
2. Since attitude is related to negotiation in three general types of opinions : affect (an internal
emotional state), appreciation (of intrinsic qualities of an object), or judgment (concerning the
way people behave), these three sub-system of attitudes are related to motivation and they are
26
mostly applied in the motivational expression, as the determinism energizer of peoples’ behavior
and achievement.
3. That is why in this paper, the writer is interested in analyzing the system of attitudes and
exploring the dominant attitude system used in the motivational expressions. Beside that this
study is also an effort to analyze the characteristics of affect, judgment and appreciation that are
applied to the motivational expression.
4. In order to find out the data for this research, the writer chose a motivational book written by
Stephen R. Covey; “The 7 habit of highly effective people” (1990) as a resource data. The selection
of this book as the data is based on the consideration that this book is one of international best
sellers in the world, the 12th rank out of 100 books, and in Indonesia this book is also best seller
and it was translated by Budijanto, and the proof reader was Lyndon Sahputra (1997). This book
has sold 25 million copies a year since its release in 1989, and has been translated into 40
languages, and forms the intellectual basis of a large corporation. This book has been chosen as 25
influencing books by Time magazine (Gordon, 2007; Jabeen, 2016).
5. The investigation to this research is analyzed by adopting Spraedley systematic approach, starting
from domain analysis, taxonomy analysis, componential analysis and finding fact/cultural value.
This work assigns several attitude features to relevant lexical items, including orientation (positive
or negative), attitude type (whether Affect, Appreciation of inherent qualities, or Judgment of
social interactions). This kind of challenging multi-dimensional analysis can allow more subtle
distinctions to be drawn than can just classifying.
1.2 The Research Questions
Based on the background of this research, this study is an investigation to answer the following
questions:
a. What kinds of attitude are applied to motivational expressions ?
b. What are the dominant Attitude system (Affect, Judgment or Appreciation) used in the
motivational expressions ?
c. What are the characteristics of words and phrases used in the motivational expressions ?
2. LITERATURE REVIEW
2.1 Appraisal Theory
Appraisal Theory is a development of Systemic-functional Linguistics (SFL) which focus on a
system of “interpersonal meaning” and they are used for negotiating a social relationships, by telling
listeners or readers how we fell about things and people (Martin and Rose, 2007:26). So, Appraisal as a
comprising of three main linguistic systems consists of (1) “Attitude”, which distinguishes different kinds
of feeling (affect, judgment and appreciation) that can be expressed (including attitude taxonomy and
orientation); (2) “Amplification”, which enables strengthening or weakening such expression (including
Force and Focus); and (3) “Engagement”, which conveys different possible degrees of commitment to the
opinion expressed (including identification and relation of the speaker/writer to the source of an attributed
evaluation).
Appraisal has focused on three key components : Attitude types specify the type of appraisal
being expressed as one of Affect, Appreciation, or Judgment (with further sub-typing possible). Affect
refers to a personal emotional state (e.g., happy, angry), and is the most explicitly subjective type of
appraisal. The other two options differentiate between the Appreciation of ‘intrinsic’ object properties
(e.g., slender, ugly) and social Judgment (e.g., heroic, idiotic).
2.2 Attitude System
Attitude system involves three semantic regions covering what traditionally referred to as “emotion,
ethics and aesthetics” (Martin and White 2005 : 42) and they are identified as Affect (valuing as
emotions), judgment (valuing as assessment of human's character) and Appreciation (valuing as
27
assessment of "things" or phenomena). The attitudinal meanings are usually expressed in adjectives, but
other lexico-grammatical features can also realize the attitudinal values explicitly or implicitly.
We can say that attitude is the central system among the three components of Appraisal. Attitude
has something to do with “our feelings, including emotional reactions, judgements of behaviour and
evaluation of things” (Martin & White, 2005:35), respectively deal with under the subsystems of Affect
(e.g., She was very unhappy), Judgment (e.g., It was rude of him to say that), and Appreciation (e.g., The
performance was enchanting). These are, in turn, categorized into different types, each with positive and
negative instances.
2.2.1 Affect
Affect is related to how people express their feelings in discourse. People express their
feeling in two general ways. Firstly, we can have good feelings or bad feelings, so affect can be positive
or negative. Secondly people can express their feelings directly, or we can infer how people are feeling
indirectly from their behavior, so effect can be expressed directly or implied. (Martin and Rose, 2007:29).
2.2.2 Judgment
Judgment reworks feelings in the realm proposals about behavior-how people behave, and the
proposals get formalized in the form of rules and regulation (Martin and White, 2005 :45). The judgment
of people’s behavior can be positive or negative and they me judged explicitly or implicitly.
2.2.3 Appreciation
Appreciation reworks feelings as prepositions about the value of things- what they are worth or not;
some of this valuations get formalized in system of awards (prices, grades, grants, prizes, etc.).
Appreciating things can be positive or negative. So we look at how people feel about people and the way
they behave. And Appreciation of things includes our attitudes about TV Shows, films, books, paintings,
performances of any kind; feelings about nature for that matter.(Martin and Rose, 2007 : 37).
As an explanation of attitude in the three domain, that is , Affect includes dis/inclination (e.g.,
‘yearn for,’ ‘fearful’), un/happiness (e.g., ‘cheerful,’ ‘sorrowful’), in/security (e.g., ‘confident,’ ‘anxious’),
and dis/satisfaction (e.g., ‘absorbed,’ ‘furious’). Judgment is divided into social esteem (normality,
capacity, and tenacity); e.g., ‘lucky’/‘eccentric,’ ‘clever’/‘weak,’ ‘brave’/‘unreliable’) and social sanction
(veracity and propriety;e.g.,‘honest’/‘manipulative,’ ‘moral’/‘corrupt’). Appreciation sub-categories are
reaction (e.g., ‘exciting,’‘monotonous’),composition (e.g., ‘balanced,’ ‘unclear’), and valuation (e.g.,
‘profound,’ ‘insignificant’). Appreciation and Judgment are seen as “institutionalized affect” (Martin &
White, 2005 : 45). One thing that can be recognized; Judgment and appreciation are regarded as
institutional feelings, which take us out of our every day common sense world into the uncommon sense
worlds of shared community value.
2.3 Motivational Expression
Motivation is a broad concept. The concept of motivation helps us understand and explain certain
intriguing facts about behavior and achievement. According to Gage and Berliner (2004 : 326)
motivation is the energizer of behavior , and also determinant of behavior, as well as the direction of
behaviour. Berliner emphasizes that “ The primary source of motivation is needs, interests, values,
attitudes, aspirations and incentives.”
Our needs and the urge to satisfy them are a primary source of motivation. But we follow as well
the paths picked for us by our interests, our values and our attitudes towards activities or events. Our
aspirations, and the incentives we are interested in, influence our behavior as well.
Richards et al (2002) define the big role of motivation as the process of starting, directing, and
maintaining physical and psychological activities; includes mechanisms involved in preferences for one
activity over another and the vigor and persistence of responses. It refers to the states within a person or
28
animal that derives behavior towards some goal. Motivation is seen by many as being fundamental to
the process of reinforcement.
From the previous research findings related to “motivation”, Oktavianti et el, (2012:28)
explained that “Motivation of the speaker would reproduce the lingual construction”, and the
motivation of the speaker becomes the basic of speaker’s objectives in communication. The selection
will influence the form of the construction and the participants involved in formulating the
construction, which carry mutual intelligibility between the speakers/participants.
Since motivation is very broad and attitude is one of the primary source of behavior which
explained as an “energizer of behavior” by Gage and Berliner, 2004: 327), so there must be something
connected between motivation and Attitude and the three elements (Affect, judgment and appreciation),
especially the kinds of feeling in the motivational text.
3. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
This research applied a descriptive qualitative method. The data of motivational expression were
obtained through purposive sampling and analyzed with a content analysis technique by referring to the
Appraisal Theory, especially the main Appraisal devices, that is “Attitude system”. From the Analysis of
the Attitude systems, it was found 946 data from the motivational book. The data were chosen by
considering 2 aspects, the motivational and Attitudinal indicators.
In order to validate the data, the triangulation was done by checking the data from different resources,
different ways and different times, as stated by William Wiersma quoted by Sugiyono (2006:306)
“Triangulation is qualitative cross-validation. It assess the sufficiency of the data according to the
convergence of multiple data sources or multiple data collection procedures”. Triangulation methods was
done in order to strengthen the validity and reliability of the data through the combination of data
checking through indepth Interview and focus group discussion (FGD) as the reinforcement of the data.
The data analysis technique was done by adopting spradley model (1980) like what is quoted by
Sugiyono (2006:284). The analysis was developed through 4 steps in sequence: domain analysis,
taxonomy analysis, componential analysis and finding fact/cultural value. The sequence of the analysis
was developed since at the beginning of the process and on-going process until the writing of the report.
The sequence research was done in circulation and Repetition while the value/cultural theme was
“grounded” from the componential analysis.
4. FINDINGS AND DISCUSSIONS
In order to provide systematic description, the results of this research will be explained in the
following sequences :
4.1 Analysing Attitude Types
From 960 attitudes data which are identified from the motivational book “The 7 habits of highly
effective people”, it was found that the fisrst highest frequency used in the motivational expression is
Judgement; 425 data (44,9%). In motivational expression, the judgement data are used mostly for
assessing people and their character and behavior. The Judgment consists of Social Esteem (Capacity,
Tenacity, Normality) and Social Sanction (propriety, veracity).
The second rank of frequency used, is Apreciation; 351 data (37,1%). If it is referred to the Attitude
Taxonomy (classifications), it involves all types of Appreciation, they are reaction (impact and quality),
composition (balance and complexity) and valuation.
The third type of Attitude is Affect, the frequency of the data is 170 data (18%). The Affect is related
to the emotion and feelings of people. Martin and Rose (2007: 65-66) classify emotions into three major
sets having to do with un/happiness, in/security and dis/satisfaction. Feeling can be experienced as
emotional disposition such as sad or happy, or they may appear as surges of bahaviour, such as crying
and laughing. These 2 categories of the feelings includes both positive (+) affect and negative (-) affect.
29
Based on the domain analysis of the Attitude applied to the motivational expression that are used by
Covey in his inspiring book, it’s found that the result of the tabulation in the following table, provides the
information about the use of attitude system in the motivational expression.
Tabel 1 : The frequency of Attitude Types applied to Motivational Expressions
In determining attitude types as explained above, the writer explores and analyze the text by
referring to the Attitude taxonomy/classification introduced by Martin and Rose, (2007, 65-69). In this
research work, attitude is explored as feelings and emotions are interpreted in English texts, and are
referred to as kinds of affect (valuing as emotions) judgment (valuing as assessment of human's
character) and appreciation (valuing as assessment of "things" or phenomena).
4.2 The Affect
Affect is related to human’s emotion and it is regarded as the center of the expressive resource that
human beings employ, and such a dimension is the affect in the Appraisal system. Affect is concerned
with positive and negative feelings, such as un / happiness (love / hate), in /security (confident /
unconfident), dis / satisfaction (pleased / annoyed), etc. The analysis of the attitude system will focus on
the Lexico-grammatical features of affect as positive and negative for the ease of identification. (The
same would apply to the identification of the other polarity resources. However, the affect could still be
present in some fields of ethnographic study, or at certain stages of the paper (e.g. findings and
discussions with focus groups on interviews or case studies of respondents) that involve evaluation of
emotions.
The characteristics of attitude meaning that are negotiated by the writer in the motivational Book;
“The 7 habits of highly effective people” consists of 13 types, as explained in the next table. The
attitudinal meanings are expressed in the form of surge of behavior (verb or verb phrase) but others are
expressed in the form of emotional disposition (adjectives) can also realize the attitudinal values
explicitly or implicitly. The following sections will exemplify how each type of attitude is realized.
Tabel 2 : The Types of Irrealis Affects applied to Motivational Expressions
NO
Kategori Affect
Frequency
Percentage Remarks
1 Disinclination fear (surge) 1 2 %
2 Disinclination fear
(disposition)
- -
3 Inclination fear (Surge) - -
4 Inclination fear (disposition) 1 2 %
5 Disinclination desire (Surge) 9 18,4% II
6 Disinclination
desire(disposition)
1 2 %
7
Inclination desire (surge)
33 67,3 % Dominant
I
8 Inclination desire (disposition) 4 8,3 III
Total 49 100%
30
From the tabulation above, it can be interpreted that the motivational expression apply Inclination
Desire in the form of surge (The highest 33 : 67,3%), followed by disinclination desire (surge) in the form
of negative affect (9 : 18,4%) and the inclination desire disposition (4 : 8,3 %). The finding shows that the
dominant affect applied in the motivational expression is “Inclination Desire” in the form of “surge”. The
following sections will show the realis affect used in motivational expressions.
Tabel 3 : The Types of Realis Affects applied to Motivational Expressions
From the tabulation above, it can be interpreted that types of realis affect used in the motivational
expression is the security (dominant, 45 : 37.2 %), followed by Unhappiness in the form of negative
affect (21 : 17.4 %) and satisfaction (20 : 16.5%). The following table will exemplify how each type of
attitude is realized.
Tabel 4. The examples of Affect Expressed in Motivational Expression
From the examples above, it can be identified that affects can be realized in various grammatical
function includes “qualities”, process and comments (Martin & Rose, 2007:64). The findings of this
research both positive and negative feeling.
31
4.3 Judgement
Judgment deals with how people should behave and shouldn’t behave (Martin & Rose, 2007:67) in
other words, it is related to the people’s behavior or character. The lexical choices of judgment are
roughly divided into judgment of esteem and sanction. Judgment of esteem involves "admiration and
criticism" (Martin, 2000 : 156) including (1) how normal / person is, (2) how to be a person is and (3)
how un / reliable a person is. Meanwhile, judgment of sanction involves praise and condemnation
(Martin, 2000, p. 156), often codified as rules and regulation, telling how one should behave, like honesty
or morality. The following table is the visualization of the judgement used in motivational expressions.
Tabel 5 : The Types of Judgement applied to Motivational Expressions
NO Types of Judgement Frequency Percentage Remarks
Social Esteem (Venial)
1 Normality (Fate +)
Is s/he special ?
9
2.1 %
2 Normality (Fate -)
Is s/he special ?
5
1.1 %
3 Capacity (+)
Is s/he capable ?
230
54 % I
dominant
4 Capacity (-)
Is s/he capable ?
45
10.5 % III
5 Tenacity(Resolve)
Is s/he dependable?
15 3.5 %
6 Tenacity(Resolve-)
Is s/he dependable?
11 2.6 %
Social Sunction (Moral)
7 Propriety (Ethics +) Is s/he
beyond reproach?
60
14 % II
8 Propriety (Ethics -)Is s/he
beyond reproach ?
28
6.6 %
9 Veracity (Truth +)
Is s/he honest ?
13 3 %
10 Veracity (Truth -)
Is s/he honest ?
11 2.6 %
Total 427 100%
From the result of the above tabulation, it can be interpreted that the motivational expression apply
social esteem; capacity (+) (The highest frequency, 230 : 54 %), followed by social sunction; propriety
ethics (+) (60 : 14 %) and social esteem; capacity (-) (45 : 10.5 %). The finding shows that the
dominant judgement applied in the motivational expression is “Social esteem; capacity (+). The
following sections will exemplify how each type of judgment is realized. Like the affective values,
judgmental expressions also can be identified according to their polarity and explicitness, with various
lexico-grammatical realities. The next table provides some examples of judgmental meanings expressed
in a text.
32
Table 6. Examples of judgmental meanings expressed in motivational expressions
NO
Text Item of
judgement
Appraised Polarity Remarks
1 He began to blossom, at his own
pace and speed. (Part.
1/p.20/ph4/l.2-3)
began to
blossom
The Son
Social
Esteem
Capacity (+)
implicit
2. He became outstanding as
measured by standard social
criteria, academically, socially,
athletically, at a rapid clip, far
beyond the so called natural
developmenttal process.
(p.20/ph4/l.3-5)
Become
outstanding
The son Social
Esteem
Capacity (+)
implicit
3 We stopped trying to kind-ly,
positively manipulate him into an
acceptable social mold. (Part.
1/p.20/ph2/l.5-6)
Positively
manipulate
The son Social
sunction
Veracity (-) implicit
4 We also consciously worked on
our motives and cultivated internal
sources of security so that our own
feelings of worth were not
dependent on our children’s
acceptable behavior (Part.
1/p.20/ph1/l.7-9)
Acceptable
behaviour
children Social
sunction
Propriety
Ethics (+)
explicit
5 Because we saw him as
fundamentally adequate and able
to cope with life, we stopped
protecting him against the ridicule
of others.(Part.1/p.20/ph2/l.6-8
Fundamen-
tally
adequate
The son Social
sunction
Propriety
Ethics (+)
Socia
implicit
6 Because we saw him as
fundamentally adequate and able
to cope with life, we stopped
protecting him against the ridicule
of others.(Part.1/p.20/ph2/l.6-8
Able to
Cope with
life
We Social esteem
Capacity (+)
explicit
From these finding, it can be identified that judgements can be realized in various polarity and
taxonomy, includes “social esteem and social sunction”, and it could be positive or negatives (Martin &
Rose, 2007:64)
4.4 Appreciation
When we assess something towards the aesthetic or value of "things", we actually turn to the
appreciation of something, that is to evaluate three aspects, (1) how things are catching our attention, (2)
how balanced or complex a thing is and (3) how worthwhile a thing is. In motivational expressions, the
type of appreciation which commonly used is Valuation (+). It is nearly half of the data; 97 out of 198.
The following table will show the types of appreciation used in motivational expression and the
frequency of the usage and the rank of the most commonly used. The examples from the data will
describe the explicit or implicit lexico-grammatical resources of appreciation, with either positive or
negative values.
33
Tabel 7. : The Types of Appreciation applied to Motivational Expressions
NO Types of Appreciation Frequency Percentage Remarks
1 Reaction (Impact)
Did it grab me ?
a Reaction Impact (+) 23 6.5
b Reaction Impact (-) 2 0.55
2 Reaction (Quality)
Did I like it ?
a Reaction quality (+) 47 13.3 II
b Reaction quality (-) 5 1.4
3 Composition(Balance)
Did it hang together?
a Composition Balance (+)
31 9
b Composition Balance (-) 2 0.55
4 Composition(Complexity)
Was it hard to follow?
- -
a Composition complexity (+) 19 5.3
b Composition complexity (-) 4 1.1
5 Valuation
Was it worthwhile?
a
Valuation (+) 180 51 I
dominant
b Valuation (-) 40 11.3 III
Total 353 100%
. From the result of the above tabulation, it can be interpreted that the motivational expression apply the
appreciation of Valuation (+), (The highest frequency, 353 : 51%), followed by Reaction quality (+) (47 :
13.3%) and the valuation (-) (40 : 11.3 %). The finding shows that the dominant appreciation applied in
the motivational expression is “valuation (+)”. The following sections will exemplify how each type of
appreciation is realized. The Appreciation applied to the motivational expressions also can be identified
according to their polarity and explicitness, with various lexico-grammatical realities. The next
table provides some examples of appreciation meanings expressed in a text.
Table 8. Examples of Appreciative Meanings Expressed in Motivational Expression
34
It was also found that the motivational expressions use special verbs (words & phrase) which contain
motivational meaning. The characteristic of the motivational verbs are always followed by “adjective of
quality” like what we can see in the following table. From the data analysis, there are some verbs that are
commonly used in motivational expression, like what we can see in the table below.
Tabel 9. The common words used in motivational expressions
No Verbs No Verbs
1 Achieve 22 Make
2 believe 23 Magnifying
3 breed 24 Motivated
ᵼ Change 25 Propel
5 Conceive 26 Recognize
6 Create 27 Realize
7 Developed 28 Represent
8 Effect 29 Reflect
9 Empower 30 Renewed
10 Elivate 31 Strengtened
11 Enable 32 Search
12 Embodied 33 Turned on
13 Expand 34 Transcend
14 Enlivened 35 Win
15 Generates 36 Work (on)
16 Enlarge 37 Utilize
17 Harmonize 38 Value
18 Influence 39 Become aware
19 Improve 40 Open up
20 Increase 42 To tap into
21 Move
Beside single specific words used, there are also some verb phrases applied to motivational
expression. From the exploration of the verb phrase, it can be identified clearly that motivational expression
use adverb of quality to strengthen the evaluation of meaning of a certain value. The phrases can be seen
below.
Tabel 10. The Verb Phrase of Motivational Expression
No Verb Phrases with adjective of quality No Verb Phrases with the adjective of quality
1 Truly effective 21 consistently derive
2 Effectively delegating 22 dramatically different
3 Highly interdependent 23 greatly increases
4 Fundamentally flawed 24 significantly impacted
5 Highly interelated 25 consciously create
6 True Independent 26 effectively delegating
7 Intelectually dependent 27 constantly seeks
8 Highly proactive 28 fundamentally flawed.
9 Highly integrated 29 deeply scripted
10 truly integrated 30 extrinsically defined.
11 Repeatedly do 31 basically says
12 Severely limit 32 really, deeply understand
13 Continually invest 33 constantly radiating,
14 increasingly victimized 34 instinctively trust
15 genuinely smile 35 collectively agrees
35
No Verb Phrases with adjective of quality No Verb Phrases with the adjective of quality
16 Reactively live 36 truly significant gain
17 Constantly monitor 37 originally proposed
18 Deeply embeded 38 genuinely enjoy
19 Beautifully integrated 39 Truly integrated
20 Seriously involved 40
6. CONCLUSSIONS
Based on the analysis on the previous description, some findings can be concluded as follows :
1. Motivational expressions contain Attitude elements in sequential frequency: Judgment 425 data (37.1 %)
Appreciation 425 data (44.9%), and Affect 170 data (18%),out of 550 data.
2. The dominant type of affect applied to motivational expression are Inclination desire, surge (33 : 67.3 %.
It means that motivational expressions appear mostly as “Surge of behavior.
3. The dominant type of judgment is Social Esteems, Positive capacity : 230 data (54 %) and Social
sanction, propriety ethics 60 data ( 14 %)and social esteem, negative capacity 45 data (10.5%). It means
that Motivational expression consist of “Capacity” positive and negative and Propriety ethics.
4. The dominant Appreciation applied to motivational expression are Positive valuation with the highest
frequency; 353 data (51%.,) followed by Reaction quality (+) (47 : 13.3%) and the valuation (-) (40 : 11.3
%). It can be concluded that motivational expressions contain more positive valuation rather than
negative valuation.
5. Motivational expressions apply “adverb phrases” with very high qualities.
6. From the findings of the dominant types of attitude system, it could be concluded that motivational
expressions and Attitudes are intertwined and closely connected.
7. REFERENCES
Atwater, E. 1993.Psychology Of Adjusment, New Jersey :Prentice Hall INC.
Gage, N.L dan D.C. Berliner , 2004. Educational Psychology, New Jersey : Houghton Mifflin Company.
Gordon, Bill. (2007) A Closer Look At Stephen Covey And His 7 Habits" Apologetics Index, retrieved
23 December 2007.
Jabeen, R. (2016) The 7 habits of highly Effective People, Article Review. Pakistan : Texila
American University. E-International Journal of Academic and scientific Research, Special
Edition. Hal 1-5.
Martin, J.R. & Rose, D. (2007). Working with Discourse. Great Britain: Athenaeum Press.
Martin & White. (2005). The Language of Evaluation. Appraisal in English. Great Britain: Palgrave Mac
Millan.
Martin. J.R. (2000). Beyond Exchange : Appraisal Systems In English. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
In Hunston, S. & Thompson,G. (eds), (2000). Evaluation in Text, Authorial Stance and the
Construction of Discourse. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 142-75.
Oktaviati, Ikmi Nur 2012. Motivasi Penutur dan Kaitannya dalam Kegiatan Berbahasa (Pemroduksian
KonstruksiLingual)(http://bahasa.kompasiana.com 24 maret 2012).
Sugiyono. 2006. Metode Penelitian Kuantitatif, Kualitatif dan R & D. Bandung : Penerbit Alfabeta.
36
37
Design Of Split AC Modification Become Air Conditioning Of
Geothermal Open System
Widiyatmoko1, Fuad Zainuri1 , Abdul Azis Abdillah1, Imam Wahyudi1 and Arifia Ekayuliana1 1Mechanical Engineering Department, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta, Prof DR. GA. Siwabessy Street, Depok, Indonesia
Keywords: AC geothermal system, open system, modification, design
Abstract: Air conditioning system is a system used to condition the air in accordance with the desired design. The
type of air conditioner commonly used at home and office is a type of split air conditioner. AC
geothermal system is an air conditioning technology that utilizes the temperature of the earth. There
are 2 types of geothermal system conditioning. That is an open system and a closed system. Research
has been carried out on modifying split air conditioners into geothermal AC system, using a closed
system. The problem that arises is what if there is a location that can facilitate the use of an open
geothermal system. Of course this will be easier and cheaper to implement than a closed system, with
supporting records of open system available free of charge. This design is carried out to provide an
alternative geothermal air conditioning system. Based on the discussion, it can be concluded that air
conditioning with modified AC split into an open geothermal system can be carried out if there are
ponds / rivers / lakes near buildings that use split air conditioners, and the implementation of split AC
modifications allows increased efficiency of energy use in the building / house
1 INTRODUCTION
Research and development of air conditioning using geothermal system has been carried out and
applied in Europe and America. At present geothermal system are also widely researched and
developed in India and other developing countries. Air conditioning using a geothermal system is
another alternative because geothermal system are considered to have higher energy efficiency than
conventional system.
The HVAC system is one of the largest components in energy consumption in a building. Private
homes can consume up to 42% of energy. Mechanical gas compression coolers require a lot of energy
(Masheiti, S., and B. Agnew, 2010). There are high-efficiency options available such as geothermal
heat pumps. Geothermal heat pumps have the highest efficiency with annual energy consumption of
up to half of the usual system (Calabro, G., and A. Fazio, 2012).
38
Fig. 1. Geothermal technology utilizing the earth's temperature (source : https://www.epa.gov/rhc/
geothermal-heating-and-cooling- technologies, accessed August 4, 2018)
The average Wk value of split AC before modification is 0.61, while the average Wk split AC
after modification (geothermal system) is 0.56 (Widiyatmoko, dan F. Irawan, 2017). This is the
reason why many things are interesting with regard to geothermal.
Geothermal system technology is a technology that utilizes the temperature of the earth (Figure 1).
There are two types of geothermal system, open system and closed system. The application and
research on geothermal in Europe and America is quite significant, especially as heat pumps (heating)
and air conditioners, supported by previous studies, increasing the writer's curiosity about the
application and research of geothermal in Indonesia. Because with the application of geothermal
systems in Indonesia, it is expected that the consumption of energy commonly used for air
conditioning is more efficient. So that research and development of geothermal systems is important
to do.
The objective of this study aims to obtain a modified air conditioning design of split AC into an open
AC geothermal system.
2. LITERATURE STUDY
2.1 Geothermal technology
Geothermal technology is a process for channeling heat or cold into a building. Geothermal heating
and cooling systems transfer heat energy from the earth, including underground water and heat
pumps or heat exchangers, to heat or cool a building.
Heat transfer between space and the earth can be achieved by passing fluid through a pipe.
This can be done by means of a pipe spinning in the ground or by pumping ground water through a
heat exchanger, then returned to the earth. So that geothermal heating or cooling systems can be
divided into two types, called open systems and closed systems (J. R. Kasich, and M. Taylor, 2012).
In some cases, geothermal heat pumps (commonly called ground-sources) can use earth as a heat
source. Geothermal pumps require an embedded pipe with a depth of 1 to 2 meters. Although
geothermal heat pumps are more expensive in installation, they are more efficient (up to 45 percent
more efficient than heat pumps with air sources). COP geothermal heat pump around 4.0 (Y.A.
Cengel, and M.A.Boles, 2006).
Modified split AC into a geothermal AC system gets the results of the COP Value on average
split AC before modification is 4.66, while the average COP split AC after modification
39
(geothermal system) is 4.05. The average Wk value of split AC before modification is 0.61,
while the average Wk split AC after modification (geothermal system) is 0.56 (Widiyatmoko, 2015).
The biggest advantage of geothermal systems is that they perform better than traditional systems
because this technology takes advantage of more stable temperatures throughout the year, so the
coefficient of performance (COP) increases, while the operational costs of heating and cooling are
reduced (R. Clement, etc, 2012). The geothermal system is classified as follows
2.1.1 Open System Geothermal :
Geothermal open systems utilize ground water as a heat exchanger (R. Clement, etc, 2012). (Figure
2). An open system consists of utilizing ground water as a heat carrier fluid. Initially, the extraction
of water from the ground, then reaches directly to the heat pump which is directly in contact with the
environment
Fig. 2. Open system geothermal (source : http://iter-geo.eu/shallow-geothermal-systems-how-
extract-inject- heat-into-ground/, accessed October 12, 2018)
2.1.2 Closed System Geothermal
Geothermal closed system is an underground heat exchanger system, but ground water is not as a
heat exchanger (R. Clement, etc, 2012). Geothermal closed systems rotate heat exchanger fluids
which typically use water or other fluids through pipes. The pipe is attached to a loop or multiple
loops that are placed vertically into the earth or horizontally on the surface of the earth (Figure 3.)
Fig. 3. Closed System Geothermal (http://iter- geo.eu/shallow-geothermal-systems-how-extract-
inject-heat-into-ground/, accessed October 12, 2018)
40
2.2 Research of Geothermal System
There are several research about geothermal system as a cooling system that already publish in
journals :
Reference (T.K.Jindal, 2012) has conducted a study of the analysis of heat transfer of geothermal
heating and cooling systems. Heat transferred through a channel can be explained by the first law of
thermodynamics. They concluded that flow velocity has a very large effect on the characteristics of
heat transfer in the channel. The thickness of the pipe does not have a large impact on heat transfer.
There are small differences in heat transfer and temperature at the output for different metals such
as aluminum, copper, and cast iron. However heat transfer for poly butyle pipes is affected but only
reaches 5% maximum. The small impact on the type of material and thickness caused by the earth is
assumed to have unlimited heat absorbing capacity.
Geothermal energy is an attractive alternative in order to utilize earth's energy for air
conditioning in buildings (both heating and cooling), using geothermal heat pumps(S. Cocchi, etc,
2013). System simulations with a 5-year period show the best settings for heat exchangers, namely 14
heat exchangers arranged in series with a distance of 10 m and a length of 100 m. the results show that
the system works well because (1) The temperature of the apartment is ensured in a comfortable
condition, (2) Land is not overly exploited, (3) The efficiency of a heat pump is very high.
Direct geothermal exchange system can be carried out using water as a refrigerant, the rate of heat
transfer in the pipe with water fluid, influenced by the dimensions of the pipe and the temperature of
groundwater (Widiyatmoko, 2015).
Research about modification of split AC to geothermal system AC Shows that performance and
compression work before being modified, the average COP is 4.66, and the average Wk is 0.61
(Widiyatmoko, F. Irawan, 2017). And the results obtained for the performance and work of
compression after modification, the average COP is 4.05, and the average Wk is 0.56.
2.3 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
The fields of refrigeration and air conditioning are related to one another, but each has a different
scope
2.3.1 Refrigerant :
Refrigerant is a substance or heat carrier fluid that functions to take heat from a cooled room or
medium and throw it into the outside environment. The type of refrigerant is divided into 2 namely
primary refrigerant and secondary refrigerant. Primary refrigerant is refrigerant used in vapor
compression systems. Secondary refrigerant is a fluid that carries heat from a cooled object to a
cooling system. The temperature of the secondary refrigerant will change when the refrigerant takes
heat but does not change the phase (W. F. Stoecker,
W. N. Jones, 1982)
2.3.2 Refrigeration Cycle
Refrigeration is the process of releasing heat from an unwanted place. There are so many
applications in the industrial world where heat has been released from several places or material for
the intended purpose (R. Miller, 2006). The Steam Compression Cycle is the most widely used
type of refrigeration today. The vapor compression cycle refrigeration machine consists of four main
components, namely a compressor, condenser, expansion device and evaporator. The arrangement of
the four components is schematically shown in Figure 4.
41
Fig. 4. Refrigeration cycle / vapor compression cycle (M.J. Moran, and Saphiro, 2006)
2.3.3 Split AC
Air conditioning unit which is divided into two parts, one part is in the room (indoor unit) and the other
2 part is outdoors (outdoor unit). Indoor units and outdoor units are connected with piping systems
(Figure 5). Indoor unit consists of components of the evaporator, expansion valve, fan (fan), and air
filter. While outdoor units consist of compressors, condensers, receivers, and fan
Fig. 5. Schema of a separate type of air system (AC split) (T. Zakaria, 1991)
3. DESIGN
Based on literature studies and previous studies, it was found that the design of modified split AC
into open AC geothermal systems, with the following scheme (Figure 6)
To get a design like the picture 6. Split AC is modified on the outdoor unit, precisely on the
condenser. The condenser section is combined with a heat exchanger which is then continued to the
open geothermal system (Figure 7)
Fig. 6. Scheme of design of air conditioning geothermal system open system
42
Fig. 7. Modification of split AC design into AC An open geothermal system
4. DISCUSSION
The use of air conditioners is unavoidable. The biggest advantage of geothermal systems is that they
perform better than traditional systems because this technology takes advantage of more stable
temperatures throughout the year, so that the coefficient of performance (COP) increases, while the
operational costs of heating and cooling are reduced. The absence of geothermal system air
conditioning products on the market, gives an impetus to make modifications to the air conditioning
system commonly used in the market.
The success of the research on the split AC modification into a geothermal AC system that had
been carried out by previous researchers, led to other design ideas. Namely the modification of
split AC into an open AC geothermal system. This is due to the opportunity owned by several
buildings or houses that use split air conditioners, located near the supporters of open systems.
Supporters can be in the form of ponds, lakes and rivers. This opportunity can be used to do energy
efficiency in the building / house by making modifications to the split AC condenser. It is hoped that
with the design of Figure 7, the implementation of the modified split AC into an open AC
geothermal system is expected
5. CONCLUSION
Based on the discussion, it can be concluded that air conditioning with modified AC split into an
open geothermal system can be carried out if there are ponds / rivers / lakes near buildings that use
split air conditioners, and the implementation of split AC modifications allows increased efficiency
of energy use in the building / house
6. REFERENCES
[G. Calabro, and A. Fazio, 2012. The Role of Geothermal Energy in Cooling and Heating
Systems,” International Journal of Academic Research in Accounting. Finance and
Management Sciences, vol.02, Issue 1, pp. 224-232
J. R. Kasich, and M. Taylor, 2012. Recommendations for Geothermal Heating and Cooling
Systems. Ohio : Ohio Water Resource Council, pp. 1-2
1
2
3 5
Information :
1. Evaporator
2. Heat exchanger
3. Water pump
4. Pool/river/lake
5. Compressor
4
43
M. J. Moran, and Saphiro, 2006. Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics. Jhon
Wiley & Sons, Inc. : London
R. Clement, J. L. Fannou, L. Lamarche, M. Ouzzane, Modelling and Analyse of a Direct Expansion
Geothermal Heat Pump (DX) : part 1 Modelling of Ground Heat Exchanger. Canada : Notre-
Dame Qouset Montreal (Quebec), 2012, pp. 1-6
S. Cocchi, S. Castellucci, and Tucci, “Modelling of an Air Conditioning System With
Geothermal Heat Pump for a Residential Building,” Hindawi Publishing Corporation
Mathematical Problem in Engineering, vol.2013, Article ID 781231, pp. 1-6, 2013
R. Miller, “HVAC Troubleshooting Guide,” The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. : New York, 2006
S. Masheiti, and B. Agnew, “Thermodynamic Simulation Modelling of Low Temperatur
Geothermal Source Located in Arid-Zone Area North Africa,” Jordan Journal of Mechanical
and Industrial Enginering, vol.4, No.1, pp 61-68, Jan 2010
T. K. Jindal, “Analysis of Heat Transfer Through A Duct Of Geothermal Cooling and
Heating System,” International Journal of Emerging Technology and Advanced Engineering,
vol. 2, Issue 10, pp 284-287, Oct. 2012.
T. Zakaria, AIR CONDITIONING & REFRIGERATION. Bandung : Institut Teknologi
Bandung, 1991
W. F. Stoecker, W. N. Jones, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning. The New York : McGaw-Hill,
1982
Widiyatmoko, “Studi Literatur Tentang Sistem Pendingin dengan Pertukaran Langsung (Direct
Exchange) geothermal dan air sebagai refrigerant,” Jurnal Austenit, vol.6, No.1, Okt 2015, pp 7-
14
Widiyatmoko, F. Irawan, “Modifikasi AC Split Menjadi AC Sistem Geotermal Menggunakan Air
sebagai Refrigeran Sekunder,” Jurnal Austenit, vol 9, pp 1-10, April 2017
Y.A. Cengel, and M.A.Boles, 2006. Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach, 5th ed., New
York : McGraw-Hill, , pp. 289-290 https://www.epa.gov/rhc/geothermal-heating-and-cooling-
technologies, accessed August 4, 2018 http://iter-geo.eu/shallow-geothermal-systems-how-
extract-inject- heat-into-ground/, accessed October 12 , 2018.
44
45
Analysis of Factors that Affect the Performance of Companies listed
on the Indonesia Stock Exchange
Petrus Hari Kuncoro Seno1, Ansori2 and Iwan Sugiwa3 1Jakarta State Polytechnicy, Prof Siwabesi Stt, Depok,West Java Indonesia
2Accounting Dept, Jakarta State Polytechnic, Prof Siwabesi St.Depok, West Java, Indonesia 3Accounting Dept, Jakarta State Polytechnic, Prof Siwabesi St.Depok, West Java, Indonesia
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
Abstract- This study aims to analyze the factors that influence the movement of stock prices which
impact on the JCI, namely inflation, interest rates, rupiah exchange rates, the amount of money circulating in
a country. . Data is processed and analyzed by multiple regression. In this study, the data used are data
obtained from the Indonesian Statistics Center and Stock Exchange. The results of the research conducted
have been tabulated and then processed using statistical software. From the results of statistical data
processing, it can be tested hypotheses that are proposed that test the factors that influence the movement
of stock prices that impact on the JCI, namely inflation, interest rates, rupiah exchange rates, the amount
of money circulating in a country. From the results of hypothesis testing, it turns out that only the variable
BI Rate has a significant influence on the Composite Stock Price Index. Other variables, namely the
exchange rate of the rupiah against the US Dollar, the level of inflation and the amount of money in
circulation apparently did not affect the performance of the company which is measured using the
Composite Stock Price Index indicator.
Keywords: corporate performance, composie stock price index, money circulation, inflation, interest rate, US dollar convertion rate
1. Introduction
The advanced technology and globalization that currently engages companies inevitably has resulted in increasingly fierce competition between companies. All companies strive to provide high quality services and products to maintain an ever-increasing number of consumers and earn high profits. Therefore, an important strategy of the company is to get profits, which will affect financial performance and to attract investors. The company will also always think of strategies for profit in the present and the future. These strategies will affect the company's financial performance, which in turn will attract investors.
According to the Indonesian Institute of Accountants (IAI), financial performance is the company's ability to manage and control its resources to generate profits. Previous research measuring company performance was Khatab et al (2011 using Return on Assets (ROA) and Return on Equity (ROE) for case studies in the Karachi stock market, the AL-Najjar Fund (2015) using Return on Assets (ROA) and Returns on Equity (ROE) for the Jordan Listed Firms and Marcia Millon Cornett et al (2007) case studies using Return on Assets (ROA) for companies incorporated in the S&P 100 (obtained from Standard & Poor's). the company is to maximize the value of the shareholders, which can be seen from the company's stock price for companies that have gone public.One of the performance indicators of stock prices in the Indonesian stock exchange market is JCI (Composite Stock Price Index) .There are several Macroeconomic variables that can affect stock price movements that impact on the JCPI are inflation, interest rates, the exchange rate of the rupiah, the money supply . By using macroeconomic factors of inflation, interest rates (BI Rate), the rupiah exchange rate (exchange rate), money supply and interest rates, this study is proposed with the title: Analysis of Factors Affecting the Performance of Companies listed on the Exchange Indonesian Securities
46
2. Research Problems
All companies strive to provide high quality services and products to maintain an ever-increasing number of consumers and earn high profits. Therefore, an important strategy of the company is to get profits, which will affect financial performance and to attract investors. In terms of shareholders the goal of corporate financial management is to maximize the value of shareholders, which can be seen from the company's stock price for companies that have gone public. In addition to being influenced by internal factors, the price of shares in the stock market is also influenced by external factors in the form of macroeconomic factors. Therefore, the problem in this study is the extent to which macroeconomic factors of inflation, interest rates (BI Rate), the exchange rate of rupiah (exchange rate), money supply and interest rates affect the performance of companies listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange ?
3. Research Objectives
Based on the formulation of the problem above, the purpose of this study is to determine the factors that affect the company's performance from the financial side.
4. Literature Review
Measuring the performance of shares traded on the exchange is used an index, namely the Composite Stock Price Index (CSPI). With CSPI investors can estimate the level of economic growth in a country and the development of investment in a country. Besides IHSG, stock price is also a factor that must be considered when an investor wants to invest in the company in order to minimize the risk of loss and gain profit in the future. There are a number of macroeconomic variables that can affect stock price movements which impact on the CSPI. Such as inflation, interest rates, the rupiah exchange rate, the money supply and the Gross Domestic Product. Based on differences in the results of research on articles written by Satoto (2013), Purnamawati (2013), Kusuma (2016), Asmara (2018) and Wismantara (2017) it is stated that several macroeconomic variables in fact have positive or negative impacts on movement stock price. Differences in the research variables of each article provide a reference to further research that there are still other variables that can affect stock price movements. Macroeconomic factors that can be controlled will help an investor in choosing a company at the right price for long-term profits so that the risks faced can later be minimized because of good fund or capital processing and in accordance with their investment plans.
In a study conducted by Kusuma, (2016) and Wismantara (2017) stated that the inflation rate has a significant negative effect on stock prices, in accordance with the theory of inflation that if the increase in prices enjoyed by the company is lower than the increase in production costs, the company's profit will fall. Declining corporate profits will make the company's stock prices go down (Tandelilin, Edward 2010: 343). When many stock prices decline, JCI will weaken. But research conducted by Purnamawati (2013) and Asmara (2018) results are reversed, namely inflation has a significant positive effect on stock prices. Likewise, research conducted by Satoto (2013) which produces positive results but not significant to stock prices. Changes in the interest rates of Bank Indonesia Certificates (SBI / BI rates) can trigger movements in the stock market. If the
SBI interest rate rises, the share price will react negatively, ie the stock price decreases, because an increase in the SBI interest rate will encourage people to invest their funds in the banking sector, rather than to the production sector or industries that have a greater risk. Based on the theory, the results of research that are in line are research conducted by Purnamawati (2013) that interest rates negatively affect stock prices both long-term and short-term, and research conducted by I Putu Wahyu, 2018 interest rates do not significantly influence stock prices. But on the other hand interest rates also have a positive effect on the stock prices examined by Satoto (2013) and Wismantara (2017). Research conducted by Satoto (2013) and Purnamawati (2013) shows that the exchange rate of the rupiah (exchange rate) has a negative influence on stock prices, the statement is not in line with the theory that the exchange rate will have an impact on stock price movements. Based on macroeconomic theory, the exchange rate and stock prices are positively related to each other if the exchange rate is expressed in units of the domestic currency per unit of foreign currency Setyaningsih (2012). This theory is consistent with research conducted by Wismantara (2017) and Kusuma (2016) that the exchange rate has a positive and significant effect on the Composite Stock Price Index on the Indonesia Stock Exchange. With improved economic performance reflected by GDP growth, investors are likely to invest more in the capital market. An increase in GDP growth can also result in an increase in the purchasing power of the people whose effects can be felt by the stock market. This is in accordance with research conducted by Satoto (2013), namely the effect of GDP on stock prices shows a significant positive effect, but research conducted by Kusuma (2016) also has a positive but not significant effect on stock prices. On the other hand, research conducted by Purnamawati (2013) is that interest rates do not have a significant negative effect on stock prices, while research conducted by Asmara (2018) has no significant effect on stock prices. Based on the difference between the theory of macroeconomic factors and the results of previous studies, some of which have been proven by several previous studies, such asinflation which in essence inflation will increase the price of goods consumed or not consumed by the public, which will increase the company's production costs and profit decline
47
will decline , then impact on the decline in share prices as well. Supported by research conducted by the 5 researchers, that 2 out of 5 researchers support the theory. Research conducted by Kusuma (2016) and Wismantara (2017) states that inflation rates have a significant negative effect on stock prices in accordance with applicable theory, but 3 other researchers state different results, namely research conducted by Purnamawati (2013) and Asmara (2018 ) the results of his research were reversed, namely inflation had a significant positive effect on stock prices. Similarly, a study conducted by Satoto (2013) which produced inflation results had a positive but not significant effect on stock prices. The second economic variable, namely the same Rrupiah exchange rate (exchange rate) produced different research results between 4 articles, 2 of which agreed that if the rupiah exchange rate had a significant positive effect on stock prices namely research conducted by Wismantara (2017) and Kusuma (2016 ) because if a country's currency strengthens (appreciates), the market will be interested in investing. This increase in demand will encourage the level of stock demand, in other words stock prices will be positively correlated with the exchange rate, whereas another case of research conducted by Satoto (2013) and Purnamawati (2013) shows that the exchange rate of the rupiah (exchange rate) has a negative influence on stock prices. Then it can be concluded that this can be used as a basis for conducting further research. By using variables that have different results from previous studies
In the research that was carried out, macroeconomic factors that will be used are inflation, interest rates (BI Rate), Rupiah Exchange Rates (exchange rates) and the amount of money circulating . The sample data that will be used is a list of share prices listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange with a time period of 5 years starting from 2013- 2017 in the Consumer Goods Industry sector. Taking the Consumer Goods Industry sector because the company in the consumer goods industry sector is a type of manufacturing company that specializes in producing consumer goods, based on the type of product produced by the company, it
will indirectly have a dependency on the level of public consumption. The potential market for consumer products in Indonesia will continue to increase every year and will indirectly encourage the growth of companies in the consumer goods industry sector. Therefore, based on all aspects that have been considered and underpinned, this study is entitled Analysis of Factors that Influence the Performance of Companies listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange.
5. Research Methodology
a. Method of collecting data The type of data used in this study is qualitative data while the data sources used are data from various
sources such as BPS, IDX and companies. The sample data that will be used is a list of share prices listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange with a time period of 5 years starting from 2013-2017 in the Consumer Goods Industry sector. Taking the Consumer Goods Industry sector because the company in the consumer goods industry sector is a type of manufacturing company that specializes in producing consumer goods, based on the type of product produced by the company, it will indirectly have a dependency on the level of public consumption. The potential market for consumer products in Indonesia will continue to increase every year and will indirectly encourage the growth of companies in the consumer goods industry sector.
b. Data Analysis Method In this research, data processing and analysis is done by using multiple linear regression analysis
techniques. . Hypothesis Testing
From the discussion above, the authors take a series of hypotheses to be tested, namely: H1: Inflation affects IHSG (Composite Stock Price index ). H2: The money supply has an effect on the IHSG H3: Dollar Exchange Rate influences IHSG
H4: Interest rates affect IHSG
6. Discussion
Figure 1 : Composite Stock Price Index (IHSG) Source:http://www.yahoo Index (IHSG)
48
The Composite Stock Price Index is calculated using the weighted average methodology based on the number of listed shares (market value) or the Market Value Weighted Average Index (Anonymous, Indonesia Stock Exchange Index Guide Book, 2010: 22). The basic formula for index calculation using this method is:
Index = (market value / base value) • 100 Market Value is the cumulative number of listed shares (used for index calculation) multiplied by the market price. Market Value is commonly called Market Capitalization. The formula for calculating Market Value is:
Market value = 𝒑𝟏𝒒𝟏 + 𝒑𝟐𝒒𝟐 + ⋯ + 𝒑𝒊𝒒𝒊 + 𝒑𝒏𝒒𝒏
Where: p = Closing price for the i-th issuer.
q = Number of shares used for index calculation (number of listed shares) for the i-th issuer. n = Number of issuers listed on the IDX (number of issuers used for index calculation) Base Value is the cumulative number of shares on the base day multiplied by the price on the base day.
The base day for the CSPI is August 10, 1982. During the 2014-2018 period, the CSPI had the lowest value of 4,223.91 points in September 2015 and
the highest value of 6,605.63 points in January 2018, the average
value of 5,351.25 points with a standard deviation of 582.41 points.
Figure 2 Inflation 2014-2018
Inflation Inflation is an increase in prices of goods that are general and continuous, based on the source or cause of rising prices that apply, inflation is usually divided into the following three forms, namely Demand Pull Inflation, Cost Push Inflation , and Imported Inflation. While there are two types of inflation based on the source or origin, namely Domestic Inflation originating from within the country and Foreign or Imported Inflation originating from abroad. Inflation has the lowest value of 2.79% which occurred in August 2016 and the highest value of 8.36% in December 2014, the average value of 4.66% with a standard deviation of 1.69.
Figure 3 Interest Rate
Interest Rate
Interest rate is the "price to be paid by the borrower of funds based on an agreed percentage"
Sunariyah (2011: 82), or in other words, the interest rate is a certain percentage calculated from the
principal of the loan to be paid by the debtor within a certain period, and received by creditors as
compensation. Whereas the reference interest rate is one of the monetary policy instruments
49
implemented by Bank Indonesia.
The current benchmark interest rate in Indonesia is the BI 7-Day (Reverse) Repo Rate which is a new
policy rate issued on April 15, 2016 and effective since August 19, 2016, replacing the BI Rate. The BI
Rate itself is the benchmark interest rate that reflects monetary policy determined by Bank Indonesia
and announced to the public. The BI Rate is announced by the Board of Governors of Bank Indonesia
every monthly Board of Governors' Meeting. The BI Rate is implemented in monetary operations
conducted by BI through liquidity management in the money market to achieve the operational targets
of monetary policy.
The replacement of the BI Rate to a 7- Day (Reverse) BI Repo Rate aims to strengthen the monetary operating framework. Strengthening the monetary operations framework is a common practice in various central banks and is an international best practice in the conduct of monetary operations.
The monetary operating framework is constantly being refined to strengthen the effectiveness of policies in achieving the set inflation targets. As the name implies, the BI 7-Day (Reverse) Repo Rate is shorter than the BI Rate. Where the BI 7-Day (Reverse) Repo Rate has a seven-day tenor, while the BI Rate has a one-year tenor. The 7-Day (Reverse) Repo Rate BI instrument is used as a new policy rate because it can quickly affect the money market, banking and the real sector. The 7-Day (Reverse) Repo Rate BI instrument as a new reference has a stronger relationship to money market interest rates, is transactional or traded on the market, and encourages financial market deepening, specifically the use of report instruments. With the use of the BI 7-Day (Reverse) Repo Rate instrument as a new policy rate, there are three main impacts expected by Bank Indonesia, namely:
a. Strengthening monetary policy signals with interest rates (Reverse) 7-day Repo Rate as the main reference in the financial markets.
b. The increased effectiveness of monetary policy transmission through its influence on the movement of money market interest rates and bank interest rates.
c. The formation of deeper financial markets, specifically transactions and the formation of interest rate structures on the interbank money market (PUAB) for 3-12 months. In the period 2014-2018, interest rates have the lowest value of 4.25% and the highest value of 7.75%, the average value of 6.15% with a standard deviation of 1.35%.
Figure 4 Money Supply 2014-2018 (in BillionsRp)
50
The Money Supply
From the data of the 2014-2018 money supply it seems that from year to year there is always an upward
trend.
Figure 5 : Currency Converion Rate
Currency Exchange Foreign exchange rates or foreign exchange rates show the price of the value of a country's currency
expressed in the value of another country's currency. Foreign exchange rates can also be defined as the amount of domestic money needed, i.e. the amount of rupiah needed, to obtain one unit of foreign currency. The exchange rate used in this study is the rupiah exchange rate (Rp) to the United States dollar (USD).
From data from 2014 to 2018, the exchange rate has the lowest value of Rp. 11,404 which occurred in March 2014 and the highest value of Rp. 15,227 in October 2018, the average value of Rp. 13,267.48 with a standard deviation of Rp. 868.71.
Research result The hypotheses to be tested in this study are: H1: Inflation affects IHSG. H2: The money supply has an effect on the IHSG H3: Dollar Exchange Rate influences IHSG H4: Interest rates affect IHSG The regression results from the variables above are as follows: Before conducting a hypothesis test, the steps that must be taken are determining the value of t table
and F table, where this value will be used as a guide for decision making during hypothesis testing. a. Determine the T Table Value
In determining the value of t table, several things must be known, namely: 1) The number of variables (k) in this study are 5 variables. 2) The number of observations (n) in this study were 60 observations. 3) The significance level in this study is 5%, because it uses two sides, the significance level becomes
0.025. 4) Degree of freedom or degree of freedom (Df = n - k). Df in this study is 60-5 = 55.
Based on the t table, with the number of variables (5), number of observations (60), and significance (two sides 0.025), the value of t table is 2.00404.
b. Determining the Table F Value In determining the table's F value, several things must be known, namely:
1) The number of variables (k) in this study are 5 variables. 2) The number of observations (n) in this study were 60 observations. 3) The significance level in this study is 5%. 4) Degree of freedom or degree of freedom for table F is divided into two, namely: Degree of freedom
as a numerator or df (N1) and Degree of freedom as the denominator or df (N2). Df (N1) = k - 1, so df (N1) in this study is 5 - 1 = 4. Df (N2) = n - k, so df (N2) in this study is 60 - 5 = 55.
51
Based on table F, with the value of df (N1) = 4, df (N2) = 55, and a significance level of 5%, the F value of the table is 2.54. After knowing the value of t table and F table which are used as guidelines for decision making, then the hypothesis test can then be performed that is by t test and F test.
Table 1: Regression Coeficient (IHSG)
Unstandardized
Coefficients
Standardized
Coefficients
B Std. Error Beta t Sig
.
(Constant)
5535.92
810.42
0
6.83
0
UANG 0 0 1.31 6.31 0
KURS -0.37 0.08 -0.56 -4.56 0
RATE 1754.6 6302.07 -0.04 -0.28 0.782
INF 4906.68 3587.4 0.14 1.37 0.177
Table 2: . Analysis Variance (IHSG)
Sum of
Squares
df
Mean
Square
F Sig.
Regression
15474546
4
3868636
46.88 0
Residual 4538660 55 82521.08
Total 20013205 59
Table 3 Model Summary (IHSG)
R
R Square
Adjusted R
Square
Std. Error of the
Estimate
0.88 0.77 0.76 287.26
R R Square Adjusted R Square
Std. Error of the Estimate
0.88 0.77 0.76 287.26
T test H1: Inflation affects IHSG (CSPI) (Y)
Based on the t test in table 1 obtained a statistical t value of 1.37 |, with a probability value of 0.177. The statistical t value is smaller than t table 2.40404 and the probability value is greater than alpha 0.05, from these results it is found that this study accepts H0 and rejects the proposed hypothesis (H1) that inflation has a significant effect on the CSPI. Then it can be concluded that inflation has no significant effect on the CSPI.
H 2. The amount of money in circulation affects the IHSG (CSPI) Based on the t test in table 1 obtained a statistical t value of | 6.31 |, with a probability value of 0. The
statistical t value is greater than t table 2.40404 and a probability value smaller than alpha 0.05, from these results it is obtained that this study rejects H0 and accepts the hypothesis proposed (H2) namely the money supply has a significant effect on the CSPI. The exchange rate coefficient is positive, it can be concluded that the exchange rate has a significant positive effect on the CSPI
3. Dollar Exchange Rate influences IHSG (CPSI) Based on the t test in table 1 obtained a statistical t value of | --4.56 |, with a probability value of 0. The
statistical t value is greater than t table 2.00404 and the probability value is smaller than alpha 0.05, from these
52
results it is obtained that this study rejects H0 and accept the proposed hypothesis (H3), namely the exchange
rate has a significant effect on the CSPI. The interest rate coefficient is negative, it can be concluded that the
exchange rate has a significant negative effect on the CSPI. 4. Interest rates affect the IHSG(CPSI)
Based on the t test in table 1 obtained the statistical t value of | -0.28 |, with a probability value of 0.782. The statistical t value is smaller than t table 2.40404 and the probability value is greater than alpha 0.05, from these results it is found that this study accepts H0 and rejects the proposed hypothesis (H4), which is that interest rates have a significant effect on the CSPI. IHSG coefficient is negative, it can be concluded that JPI has a negative effect on CSPI.
Conclusions From the results of the research that has been carried out it turns out that of the 4 independent variables
tested against the JCI, only two variables have a significant effect on the JCPI, namely the variable money supply and the IDR-USD currency exchange rate.
References
Anonymous. (2010). Indonesia Stock Exchange Stock Price Guidebook. Jakarta. Anonymous. (2014). OJK Regulation Number 39 / POJK.04 / 2014 Concerning Investment Fund Selling
Agents. Anonymous. (2017). Fund Fact Sheet Sucorinvest Equity Fund Mutual Funds. Anonymous. (2018, December 27). Press Release: 21 Years of KSEI, Innovations for the Convenience of
Transactions in the Capital Market. Taken back from the Indonesian Central Securities Depository: https://www.ksei.co.id/publication/press- releases
Anonymous. (2018). Fund Fact Sheet Sucorinvest Equity Fund Mutual Funds. Anonymous. (2018, July 31). Inflation. Picked April 22, 2019, from Bank Indonesia:
https://www.bi.go.id/en/moneter/inflasi/intr oduction/Contents/Default.aspx Anonymous. (2019). Fund Fact Sheet Sucorinvest Equity Fund Mutual Funds. Anonymous. BI 7-Day (Reverse) Repo Rate. Picked April 22, 2019, from Bank Indonesia:
https://www.bi.go.id/en/moneter/bi-7day- RR/explained/Contents/Default.aspx Anonymous. Index. Picked September 9, 2019, from the Indonesia Stock Exchange:
https://www.idx.co.id/en-us/produk/indeks/ Anonymous. Jakarta Composite Index Historical Data. Picked July 22, 2019, from Yahoo Finance:
https://finance.yahoo.com/quote/%5EJKSE/ history Anonymous. (March 2019). Sucorinvest Equity Fund Mutual Fund Prospectus. Anonymous. Investment Management Investment Information Industry Center. August 1, 2019,
from the Financial Services Authority: https://reksadana.ojk.go.id/Public/StatistikN ABReksadanaPublic.aspx Anonymous. Investment Management Investment Information Industry Center. Picked April 25, 2019,
from the Financial Services Authority: https://reksadana.ojk.go.id/Public/StatistikC ompositionRDPGeneral TypePublic.aspx
Anonymous. Indonesian Economic and Financial Statistics (SEKI) - Current Data - External Sector. Picked July 22, 2019, from Bank Indonesia: www.bi.go.id/en/statistik/seki/terkini/ekster nal/Contents/Default.aspx
Anonymous. Indonesian Economic and Financial Statistics (SEKI) - Latest Data - Monetary Sector. Picked July 22, 2019, from Bank Indonesia: www.bi.go.id/en/statistik/seki/terkini/monet er/Contents/Default.aspx
53
Virtual Machine Utilization Study on Computer Network
Infrastructure Design
Defiana Arnaldy
Jurusan Teknik Informatika dan Komputer Politeknik Negeri Jakarta [email protected]
Hata Maulana
Jurusan Teknik Informatika dan Komputer Politeknik Negeri Jakarta [email protected]
Abstract- The absence of national standardization in designing the construction of a network
infrastructure, has caused the design of computer network infrastructure to be varied, although
when viewed from the side of providers of network equipment there are several criteria available
to design a good network infrastructure. One variation in network infrastructure design can
utilize virtual machine technology. For use on a small scale such as SOHO (small Office Home
Office), the use of virtual machines in designing network infrastructure can be useful. The use
of virtual machines is expected to increase efficiency in building a computer network
infrastructure on SOHO, because by utilizing virtual machines, network devices such as routers,
switches, or hubs can be removed.
Keyword: network infrastructure, SOHO, virtual machine.
I. INTRODUCTION
The development of computer networks today can be said to have reached a mature level;
however, the implementation of computer networks is still growing. In essence the computer
network is the use of resources (resources) together at the same time. In designing computer
network infrastructure, SOHO (small office home office) requires devices such as: several
computer units, as well as several network devices such as routers, switches and hubs. In
addition, connecting media such as cables or air are needed when using wireless networks.
SOHO (small office home office) is a category of offices that have fewer than 10 employees.
Because of the small number of employees in the
company, the technological devices used do not require large amounts. But if it can be more
efficient, especially in terms of computer needs, the procurement of computer network
infrastructure will be better [1].
Network infrastructure in an organization can be defined as a network infrastructure model that
explains how each element of the network as well as the management of the academic system
work together in a unified whole [2].
The absence of national standardization in designing the construction of a network
infrastructure, has caused the design of computer network infrastructure to be varied, although
54
when viewed from the side of providers of network equipment there are several criteria
available to design a good network infrastructure [3].
One way to do efficiency in designing network infrastructure is to use a virtual machine (VM).
Along with the development of technology, there is now a lot of circulating software called
virtual machine (VM) which is a replication of a computer unit. Virtual machine is the
implementation of software from a computer machine that can run programs just like an original
computer, meaning that by using a virtual machine, in one unit the computer can run more than
one operating system [4].
Other research that utilizes virtual machines is done by Budijono and Saleh, namely the use of
virtual machines in network learning. In his research Budijono and Saleh compared two virtual
machines, namely Virtual Box and Microsoft Virtual PC [5]. While Irawan conducted research
on the use of virtual machines using VMWare to facilitate lectures [6].
Similar research was also conducted by Hernawan, by utilizing a virtual machine to support
computer network practicum in his study program. In his research, it was stated that the use of
computers to do computer network practicum required a variety of hardware and large
quantities.
A number of computers are needed both as a server and client, in addition to a number of
computers, network infrastructure devices such as routers, switches, cables and wireless
devices are also needed. Routers and switches can be special hardware, but can also be a
computer with a number of network cards, then specifically configured. Thus, to do a computer
network practicum requires a large number of computers. [7].
The use of virtual machines is expected to streamline a computer network infrastructure on
SOHO, because by utilizing a virtual machine, network devices such as routers, switches, or
hubs are not needed.
There are some related works that also focus on virtual machine utilization but from
different standpoints, such as network-aware virtual machine placement in cloud data centers
with multiple traffic-intensive components [8]. Ilkhechi et al. [8] study the problem of finding
an optimal assignment of a set of Virtual Machine (VMs) into a set of Physical Machines
(PMs) with assuming that the number of PMs is greater than or at least equal to that of VMs.
II. ROAD MAP RESEARCH
This research is part of a series of studies that have been carried out by previous researchers.
This research refers to the researcher's core study, namely the network field. In previous studies
researchers have conducted research for the same study, namely the use of virtual machines in
network infrastructure in the Informatics Engineering Study Program at the Faculty of Science
and Technology, UIN Jakarta, but not yet published.
In this study researchers conducted a network infrastructure design using one laptop
accompanied by the use of VGA splitters to divide the display of operating systems that are
networked. While in the current study researchers will apply in the Jakarta State Polytechnic
Information and Computer Engineering Department using a computer accompanied by the use of
an additional number of VGA cards. Capitalizing on previous research is expected to be able to
55
make a real contribution to where researchers are.
The next research roadmap after successfully establishing a network infrastructure using virtual
machines is data integration, so that data can be accessed together. Data can be in the form of
student data or other data needed by the academic community both lecturer data and student
data. The current condition of the data is still spread on several different computers. With the
formation of a virtual machine-based network infrastructure, the integration of data in terms of
sharing can be more efficient.
If the network infrastructure and data sharing been running, the next research plan is to develop
the scale of the network infrastructure, so that not only in the administrative department but the
entire network of Informatics and Computer Engineering Departments implement virtual
machine-based network infrastructure.
Figure 1 shows the road map of the research that has been carried out, is being carried out and
will be carried out related to this study. The study began in 2013 and the plan in 2023 was made
on a computer network technology based on virtual machines in the Informatics and Computer
Engineering Department.
Figure 1. Research road map
III. METHOD
After conducting studies on the utilization of virtual machines in building network
infrastructure, the implementation of the next plan is planned with the following steps. The
method used in this study consists of several stages. In the chart the research method / research
steps will look like in Figure 2.
Figure 2. Research chart
The stages are:
1. Analysis of Computer Networks
At this stage, identification of computer network requirements is carried out. Need identification
is based on literature studies and literature on the definition of computer networks, small office
home office, and virtual machines.
Identification of the needs of the tools used consists of the development environment on the
56
server side as a service provider, which is where the virtual machine will be installed. While on
the client side only consists of one- unit monitor, keyboard and mouse.
Server-side development environment:
PC high spec
8 GB RAM
Microsoft Windows 10 Operating System
USB Hub
VGA Card Additional
Client-side environment:
Monitor
Keyboard and mouse
2. Configuration design and implementation
At this stage the design is done to configure the connection from server to client using a virtual
box which is one of the virtual machines used.
Configuring the server
The server used is a PC (personal computer) that has high specifications both memory and hard
drive capacity. The need for high hard drive and memory capacity because some of the hard
drive and memory will be used by the virtual machine.
Configuring the client
On the client side there isn't much that needs to be done, because the client is only a monitor
equipped with a keyboard and mouse. The operating system on the client is one of the contents of
the virtual machine therefore the monitor on the client only functions to display while the
keyboard and mouse function to operate the virtual operating system.
Network Infrastructure
The network infrastructure built can be seen in Figure 3.
Figure 3. Network Infrastructure
3. Analysis and Discussion
At this stage, testing of the infrastructure that has been built using Wireshark tools will be
carried out. The parameters used to measure the performance of this virtual machine-based
network infrastructure include, throughput, delay and packet loss, by referring to the TIPHON
(Telecommunications and Internet Protocol Harmonization Over Networks) standard so that
with the formation of this network infrastructure and by testing it can know performance of
this network [9]. In conducting the test, 3 test scenarios will be carried out, namely:
57
1. Testing by sending a text file
2. Testing by sending an image file
3. Testing by sending sound files
In each scenario it is planned to repeat 5 times to retrieve data for each parameter. The results of
data collection will be analyzed and discussed.
IV. RESULTS
The initial step in conducting a study of the virtual use of machines in the design of network
infrastructure is to analyze the infrastructure needs to be built. This is done by identifying all the
needs both in terms of software and hardware. The hardware requirements used are one
computer unit with high specifications, which will be used as a host computer, equipped with
equipment in general, namely the keyboard, mouse, and monitor. The use of computers that
have high specifications aims to operate properly, because the host computer will be burdened
with one unit of virtual software called virtual box. One of the main components in selecting
computer specifications is the processor and memory (RAM), while the hard drive can be
customized accordingly, because operating system data storage in virtual boxes can be stored on
a different partition from the host operating system.
The use of a VGA card is adjusted to the number of clients to be shared, for example the
number of clients that will share a number of 2 units, then one VGA card unit is needed which
has output of 3 types. One type for host monitors, while the other two types are used as inputs
for client 1 and client 2 monitors.
The next step is to design for a virtual machine-based network infrastructure. The design used
can be seen in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Network infrastructure design
The explanation for Figure 4 is that one CPU / computer can display two different operating
systems on different monitors. Equipped with supporting devices, namely the keyboard and
mouse for each operating system.
The monitor server / host displays the operating system that is directly installed on the computer
/ CPU, while the client monitor displays the operating system installed on the virtual box
installed on the host operating system. The description of how the CPU works for virtual box
58
installation can be seen in Figure 5.
In Figure 5 you can see the parts of the operating system and the software used, namely the
virtual box. The host operating system is an operating system that is installed directly on the
computer, then the operating system is installed virtual machine software, namely the virtual
box, and the virtual box is installed by the operating system called the guest operating system.
The virtual box display can be seen in Figure 6.
Figure 5. Overview of host and guest operating systems
The way it works for virtual machine-based network infrastructure is that the operating system
installed in the virtual box will be displayed on the client monitor, then the supporting devices
such as the mouse and keyboard are installed on the server computer and configured by
configuring the virtual box so that it can be used only for the system guest operation. So that
each operating system will have its own keyboard and mouse that are not interconnected. This
means that each operating system is free from each other.
Figure 6. Display of virtual boxes
As for the network options can be used according to needs. In the virtual box there are four
network adapter options, namely NAT, Internal, host only, and bridged. Virtual box provides an
opportunity in one virtual machine to activate up to four adapters. Explanation for each type of
adapter, namely NAT network is the default network of virtual boxes, by selecting this mode, the
59
user does not need a network configuration to connect the guest operating system with an
internet connection that is owned by the host operating system, because as the name implies
NAT (network address translation). For bridged network mode, the configuration is used so that
the guest operating system is connected according to the network of the host operating system.
The internal mode is a mode where connections only occur between machines in a virtual box,
so they cannot be connected to external networks or to the host operating system. Finally, the
host only mode is a type of network that only allows connections between guest operating
systems and guest operating systems. Figure 7 shows the adapter modes used in the virtual box.
Figure 7. Adapter Mode in Virtual Box
The final step in the study of virtual machine utilization in network infrastructure design is to
analyze performance testing of the infrastructure built. Because this is still a study, so the
results of the tests cannot be displayed. The results of this test will be planned using 3
scenarios, namely sending text, image, and sound files. This test is carried out to determine
network performance on virtual machines in this case a virtual box. So that by knowing the
performance of the virtual box network can be seen the performance of virtual machine-based
network infrastructure.
The parameters used are Throughput, delay, and packet loss, where each scenario will be
repeated 5 times for each parameter. The results of the tests will be analyzed to obtain a value
that can be used as material for discussion. The standard used as a reference is TIPHON with
the following values [10]:
Table 1. Standard Delay Value Category Delay (ms)
Very good < 150
Nice 150 – 300
Is being 300 – 450
Not acceptable >450
source: TIPHON
Table 1 shows the standard that will be used for the delay value, meaning that the delay value for
each test will be compared with that of table 1, so that it can be obtained whether the category is
60
very good, good, moderate, or not acceptable.
While the value of packet loss can be compared with the TIPHON standard in table 2. This
means that the value of each test performed will be compared so that it can be obtained including
very good, good, moderate, or unacceptable categories.
Table 1. Standard packet loss Value Category Packet loss (%)
Very good 0
Nice 3
Is being 15
Not acceptable 25
source: TIPHON
V. CONCLUSION
The conclusion that can be obtained from the results of this study is that virtual machine-based
network infrastructure is theoretically possible for SOHO. But for a larger scale requires further
study, because it requires a computer that has very high specifications, especially parts of the
processor and memory (RAM).
The parameters used in determining network performance can follow applicable quality of
service standards. The parameters in question are throughput, delay and packet loss. The
standard reference used can use TIPHON (Telecommunications and Internet Protocol
Harmonization Over Networks) standards.
REFERENCES
[1]. Yupardhi T. H., Wahjudi D., and Handoko B. 2016. Kajian Pola Kontrol Privasi Penghuni
Terhadap Penerapan Konsep Soho (Small Office Home Office) Pada Rumah Tinggal Di
Kota Bandung. Serat Rupa Journal of Design. 1, 1 (100-114). [2]. Hadziq M., F., Fatoni, and Komalasari D. 2018.
http://if.binadarma.ac.id/sipi/jurnal/ diakses pada 28 Juli 2019.
[3]. Ismail A. 2017. Standarisasi Infrastruktur Jaringan Komputer Sekolah Berbasis Cisco Safe
Concept Untuk Menunjang Sistem Informasi Sekolah. Journal of Informatics Engineering
Vol.5 No.1 April 2017. ISSN: 2252-5351.
[4]. Oracle VM VirtualBox. User Manual. Version 4.2.16. 2004-2013 Oracle
Corporation. http://www.virtualbox.org.
[5]. Budijono S., and Saleh R. 2014. Penggunaan Virtual Machine Dalam Pembelajaran
Jaringan. ComTech Vol. 5 No. 1 Juni 2014: 495-504.
[6]. Irawan D. 2016. Mesin Virtual Menggunakan VMWare untuk mengoptimalkan Jaringan
Internet Guna Memfasilitasi Perkuliahan. Jurnal Manajemen Informatika. Vol 6,
No.2. https://ojs.ummetro.ac.id/index.php/mikrotik/article /view/441.
[7]. Hernawan A. 2013. Pemanfaatan Teknologi Virtualisasi Komputer guna Mendukung
Praktikum Jaringan Komputer. Seminar Nasional Aplikasi Teknologi Informasi
61
(SNATI) 2013. ISSN: 1907 – 5022.
[8]. Ilkhechi A.R., Korpeoglu I., and Ulusoy O. 2015. Network-aware virtual machine
placement in cloud datacenters with multiple traffic-intensive components. Computer
Networks 91 (2015) 508- 527. Elsevier. ScienceDirect.
[9]. Agusriandi. 2016. Analisis Delay Jitter, Throughput, dan Paket Lost Menggunakan Iperf3.
IlmuKomputer.com. diakses pada 22 Juli 2019.
[10]. ETSI TR 101 329 V2.1.1 (1999-06).
http://www.etsi.org/deliver/etsi_tr/101300_101399/
101329/02.01.01_60/tr_101329v020101p.pdf
62
63
Effect of Magnesium on Weld Quality and Microstructure of
Underwater Wet Welding Joints
Dewin Purnama1,a, Seto Tjahyono1
1Department of Mechanical Engineering, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta. Depok-16424, Indonesia a Corresponding author: [email protected]
Keywords: SMAW; E6013 Electrodes; Magnesium; Microstructure
Abstract: Underwater wet welding is one option that can be applied in overcoming underwater emergencies,
especially in the case of saving the ship damage. The base metal used in this study was low alloy high
strength low alloy (HSLA) AH 36. The welding process used the E6013 as a rutile electrode. Four
rutile electrodes were produced by adding 0, 1, 3 and 5 wt. % magnesium metal powder to the initial
electrode layer in such a way as to obtain Mn and Si deposits according to ANSI / AWS standard
A5.1-91. The shielding metal arc welding (SMAW) method was used with a heat input of 1.5 kJ/mm
and 2.5 kJ/mm. To find out the surface quality and defect, first conducted a Non-Destructive Test
(ASME V) like a penetrant test (PT) and Radiography test (RT). The observation of the metallographic
structure was performed by using an optical microscope. The results showed that the increase of Mg
layer content is attributed to both the refined microstructure and the bainite dominated
microstructure in the weldment.
1. INTRODUCTION
Under certain conditions, underwater welding is one of the options used for repairing and maintenance activities of underwater construction in marine industry. Underwater welding is an important role in the rescue of ships and underwater structures, in case of emergency. The type of wet welding is generally implemented by the method of Shielding Metal Arc Welding (SMAW). This method is widely used due to the economic cost and simple equipment (Elliott and Pollack).
Methods and implementation of underwater wet welding are carried out in accordance with the standards of American Welding Society (AWS) D3.6M: Underwater Welding Code. Underwater Welding divided into three welding classes, namely welding class A, class B and class O. Underwater A class welding is more applicable and easy to design stresses compared with atmospheric welding for the properties specifications and testing requirements. For class B underwater welding is intended for less critical applications such as low elasticity, moderate porosity and other tolerable constraints. And class O welding is requiring design codes or other standards, according to the additional requirements specified herein to address the underwater welding environment (Pessoa et al., 2013).
Rutile base electrodes have the highest percentage among other electrodes from the total of
manual electrode productions that have been produced for years (Surian and de Rissone, 1999).
The E6013, E7014 and E7024 rutile base electrodes are the type of electrodes widely used for
welding in an atmospheric condition, especially in SMAW welding, because they have perfect
arc stability, suitable for all welding position, ease of handling, and excellent weld bead
appearance after being welded (Brziak et al., 2011). E7014 and E7024 are mostly used in high
strength steel welding but they are costly, and their availability in the market is limited (Winarto
64
et al., 2018). Another type of electrode that is easily found on the market and costs less than
other rutile-based electrodes is E6013 electrode. However, this type of electrode is rarely used
for high strength structural applications because the mechanical properties of the weldment
resulting from this type of electrode are low (De Rissone et al., 2002).
Many efforts have been performed by many investigators to increase the mechanical
properties of the resulting weldment of this electrode. It has been found that the E6013 electrode
can increase the toughness of all metal welding through at least two different ways; (a) increase
slag basicity by increasing the content of CaCO3 (De Rissone, 1997,
Ramini De Rissone et al., 2001), and (b) with the incorporation of a strong deoxidant such as
magnesium powder and titanium as coating to produce lower oxygen levels (Surian, 1997, Ramini
De Rissone et al., 2001). Other investigators (Boniszewski and Evans, 1995b) found that by
adding elements of magnesium and titanium, there will be a change in the microstructure
evolution and increased toughness properties in the weld metal and HAZ regions. Further, they
found that the addition of Mg elements required that that Si content in the weld metal should be
kept below a specific value to ensure proper weld toughness (Boniszewski and Evans, 1995b,
Boniszewski and Evans, 1995a). The development of research on the addition of magnesium to
rutile-based electrodes E7024 has been carried out by Surian (Surian, 1997) and found that
increased MgO content in the slag resulted in increasing impact resistance and reduce diffusible
hydrogen content in metal deposits in the weld metal.
Manufacturers of consumable welding produce more coated rutile electrodes than usual
because the type of rutile is technically better than the basic one (Surian, 1997). In addition, rutile
electrodes are used for joining using the shielded metal arc welding (SMAW). Because of that,
this electrode is in high demand because it is an inexpensive and straightforward operation (Ibarra
et al., 1989).
Due to its high demand in the application, the investigation is intended to determine the
operating characteristics of diffused electrodes and hydrogen from deposited metals. The reason
for choosing Mg powder is that it can reduce the oxygen content in the weld deposits (Evans,
1980, Kotecki, 2000), which is transferred to slag and increases its basicity, and thus will improve
its weldment mechanical properties.
2. EXPERIMENTAL METHOD
2.1 Materials
In this experiment, the steel plate AH 36 was used with the SMAW process. Table 1 below
exhibits the elemental composition of these parent materials, while in table 2 mechanical
properties, and microstructures photograph are shown in Figure
1. The microstructure of the AH-36 steel consists of fine granules with perlite and ferrite
structures. Based on the calculation of the formula from carbon equivalent (CE), the CE value of
the AH 36 plate steel is 0.212.
Figure 2 shown the specimen steel plate with V- groove 45° on dimension 200 x 150 x 10
mm. The backing plate is used for root opening 2 mm.
65
Table 1: The chemical composition of AH-36 steel plate
Elements (wt. %)
C Si Mn P S Al
0.058 0.193 0.87 0.012 0.001 0.033
Nb V Ti Cr Ni Cu
0.038 0.03 0.01 - - -
The CE formula : %C + %Mn / 6+ % (Cr + V) / 5 + %(Ni +Nb
+Ti) / 15
Table 2: Mechanical properties of AH-36 steel plate (Purnama et al., 2018)
Tensile `
Yield strength (YS) : 428 N/mm2
Tensile strength (TS) : 497 N/mm2
Elongation (EL) : 22%
Impact AVG : 59 J oC : 0%
Figure 1 Microstructure of AH-36 base metal
Figure 2: The welding specimen with single V-groove joint design
2.2 Electrodes
The ingredients of four rutile-grade electrodes were produced at the workshop (Olson, 1993);
presented in Table 3. The diameter of 3.2 mm and
2.5 mm electrodes was using low carbon steel core rods
66
Table 3 The flux composition for the experimental rutile electrodes
Mineral wt. pct
Calcium carbonate (CaCO3) 3
Cellulose (C6H10O5) 7
Ferromanganese (FeMn) 8
Potassium silicate (K2O3Si) 13
Sodium silicate 8
Titanium dioxide (TiO2) 61 100
Four types of electrodes are produced by adding magnesium to the current E6013 electrode as
presented in Table 4.
Table 4: Magnesium additions to the E6013 electrodes
Code of
electrode
Magnesium
(in wt. %)
1 0
2 1
3 3
4 5
Magnesium powder used to cover the electrode flux was first weighed, and the amount can be
seen in Table 4 and is mixed into varnishing solution. The mixture was then applied to the
electrode by brushing. The experimental electrodes were waterproofed with commercial varnish
and dried at room temperature for 24 hours. Removing the rest of flux moisture, the dry electrode
baked at 100ºC for two hours.
2.3 Welding parameters
The SMAW welding process method used in this research and E6013 electrode as a filler metal
which has been modified by adding magnesium as much as 0, 1, 3 and 5 wt. %. Table 5 presents
the welding parameters.
2.4 Metallography and Non Destructive Testing
The microstructure of weld metal, HAZ and base metals were observed using microscope
optic (Zeiss Primo Star, Germany). The specimens are ground with 1500-grit emery papers and
polished by diamond paste and etched with 3% nitric acid solution. The elemental composition
of weld metal and slag were analyzed with energy dispersive spectroscopy (EDS). The fracture
surfaces of impact test welded joints were also examined using a scanning electron microscope
(EVO MA10, Zeiss). Penetrant test (PT) and radiographic test (RT) were carried out to
investigate weld defects
67
Table 5: Welding parameters
3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
3.1 Analysis of penetrant test (PT) and radiographic test (RT) of welds
3.1.1 Radiographic test
Figure 3 shows the results of a radiographic test of the welding process using E6013 which
has been added zero, one, three and five wt. % Mg content on each electrodes.
At a heat input of 1.5 Kj / mm, the addition of 0 wt% and 1 wt% Mg (Figure 3a, 3b) does not
indicate a defect in the weldment, but with an additional 3 wt% Mg shows a defect in the form
of porosity and slag inclusion (Figure 3c ), then with an additional 5 wt% Mg there is a welding
defect in the form of a blow hole and undercut on the weld results (Figure 3d). This defect is
formed due to the decomposition of oxygen trapped in the weld pool.
Whereas the heat input is 2.5 Kj / mm, the result is almost the same as the welding process
that uses a heat input of 1.5 Kj / mm. However, the quantity of defects during the weldment is
less when compared to the heat input of 1.5 Kj / mm, this is due to the higher heat input which
can reduce the trapped slag in the weld pool.
Figure 3 Radiography of weldments by addition of (a, e) 0% Mg, (b, f) 1% Mg, (c, g)
3% Mg and (d, h) 5% Mg
3.1.2 Penetrant test
Figure 4 shows the results of the penetrant test welding process using E6013 which has been
added zero, one, three and five wt. % Mg content on each electrodes.
At a heat input of 1.5 Kj / mm, there are generally no significant welding defects, many defects
are formed at the beginning of the welding process, this is caused by electrodes that are difficult to
ignite at the beginning of the welding process.
Whereas in the welding process that uses 2.5 Kj/mm heat input, defects occur only in the
welding process that uses an additional 5 wt% Mg (Figure 4h). Defects that occur in the form of
Weld pass
Filler metal (Modified) Current
Type and
Polarity
Ampere Volts Travel
Speed Heat Input
Class Dia. (mm) (A) (V) (mm/min.) (kJ/min)
Root 6013 2.5 DCEP 85-95 25-26 100 1.5
Root 6014 2.5 DCEP 85-95 25-26 60 2.5
Filler 6015 3.2 DCEP 110-130 25-26 130 1.5
Filler 6016 3.2 DCEP 110-130 25-26 70 2.5
HEAT INPUT 1,5 Kj/mm HEAT INPUT 2,5 Kj/mm
h) d)
g) c)
f) b)
e) a)
68
blow holes and worm holes, this is likely caused by a deposit of flux that is trapped in the weld
pool.
The addition of magnesium causes reduced oxygen levels in weld metal and increases the
manganese (Mn) content. Increase in number manganese elements will reduce porosity as
reported by Rowe (Rowe et al., 1999).
Figure 4: Penetrant test of weldments by addition of (a, e) 0% Mg, (b, f) 1% Mg, (c,
g) 3% Mg and (d, h) 5% Mg
3.2 Analysis of microstructure
3.2.1 Weld Metal
Metallographic analysis conducted to compare and analyzing microstructure morphology in
Weld Metal for electrodes A1–A4 and B1–B4 at different heat input on underwater welding. In
heat input 1.5 kJ/ mm, columnar microstructure in WM showing smaller ferrite grain size than in
HAZ as shown in Figure 5, and the microstructures consist of pure ferrite (PF), side plate ferrite
(SPF) and grain boundary ferrite (GBF). It is caused by high heat input in the welding process. In
weld metal show in small quantity lower Martensite and upper Bainite, due to high enough heat
input in the welding process to slow down cooling rate.
The presence of acicular ferrite (AF) after additional Mg content of 1 wt%, as shown in
Figure 5(b). The increasing Mg content up to 3 wt.%, the presence of acicular ferrite (AF)
increases and a lath martensite presence as shown in Figure 5(c). Figure 5(d) showed the lath
martensite presence.
Ti-Mg-O compound oxides are potent to nucleate an acicular ferrite, and single-phase MgO
is impotent to nucleate an acicular ferrite. Zhu et al (Zhu and Yang, 2011) also found that Mg
could evidently increase the ratio of acicular ferrite crystals appearing at large angles boundaries
to each other in weld metal and HAZ of low carbon steels.
b)
HEAT INPUT 1,5 Kj/mm HEAT INPUT 2,5 Kj/mm
h) d)
g) c)
f)
e) a)
69
(c) (d)
Figure 5: The columnar microstructures in weld metal of heat input: 1.5 kJ/mm with magnification
500X (a) A1, (b) A2, (c) A3, (d) A4
Figure 6 showed a microstructure in WM with the heat input of 2.5 kJ/mm, the microstructure
of specimens without Mg; the microstructure almost resembled the microstructure of A1. With
further increase of Mg content, the acicular ferrite (AF) grown on the columnar grain in the WM
as Mg content increased from 1 wt. % to 5 wt. %, as shown in Figure 6(b) and 6(c). The
microstructure showed the full of lath martensite as seen in Figure 6(d).
From the morphologies and products of view, for sample B2, the microstructure is
characterized by a mixture of polygonal ferrite, pearlite, and a little bainitic ferrite. For sample 2
(1 wt.% Mg), the amount of polygonal ferrite reduces, and the matrix phase is substantially
bainite. When the concentration of Mg is 3 wt.% (sample B3), the polygonal ferrite disappears,
and the matrix phase is substantially bainite, of which a certain amount of acicular ferrite and
granular bainitic ferrite are also detected. This indicated that the bainite phase usually possesses
high strength and good toughness for structural applications compared with the conventional
ferrite–pearlite phase.
Hence, the improved toughness and tensile of Mg- containing steels are attributed to both the
refined microstructure and the bainite dominated microstructure in steel.
(a) (b)
(a) (b)
70
(c)
(c) (d)
(d)
Figure 6: The columnar microstructures in weld metal of HI: 2.5 kJ/mm with magnification 500X (a)
B1, (b) B2, (c) B3, (d) B4
3.2.2 Heat affected zone (HAZ)
Figure 7 showed a microstructure of WM- HAZ-BM with a heat input of 1.5 kJ/mm. Figure
7(a) is a typical HAZ microstructure without the addition of magnesium; there are grains in the
form of coarse grain and fine grain. The average width of the columnar grain is between 300 µ m
and 500 µ m. The size of the coarse grain is getting smaller because of the addition of magnesium.
Decreasing grain size improved the mechanical properties, namely increasing the value of impact
toughness and the tensile strength. Hasil ini sesuai dengan penelitian yang dilaporkan Chai et al.
(Feng et al., 2009), that Mg addition effectively improved the coarse-grained heat affected zone
(CGHAZ) microstructure and impact toughness.
As a result of the increasing coating Mg content there was also a progressive microstructural
refinement in the reheated regions subjected to austenitizing temperature by the subsequent
passes.
Figure 7: The columnar microstructures in WM-HAZ-BM of heat input: 1.5
kJ/mm with magnification 200X (a) A1, (b) A2, (c) A3, (d) A4
(a) (b)
71
Figure 8 showed the HAZ microstructure with a heat input of 2.5 kJ/mm. The size of the HAZ
coarse grain and columnar grain width with an HI of 2.5 kJ/mm is relatively smaller in size than
HI of 1.5 kJ/mm. In the Charpy impact test results, the HI of 2.5 kJ/mm is higher toughness than
the heat input of 1.5 kJ/mm, especially in the Mg content of 5 wt. %. The metallographic analysis
shows that the increased Mg content in electrode coatings can be refined and reduce non-metal
inclusions be fewer and smaller in the recrystallization structure of the Charpy-V test results, as
reported by Abson. These factors will contribute to increasing toughness (Abson and Pargeter,
1987).
Figure 8: The columnar microstructures in WM-HAZ-BM of heat input: 2.5
kJ/mm with magnification 200X (a) B1, (b) B2, (c) B3, (d) B4
4. CONCLUSIONS
The effect of Magnesium addition on the characteristics of weld quality and microstructure
under water welding joint in AH-36 steel has been investigated. The basic conclusions are the
following: (a) based on Penetrant and Radiography testing, the addition of magnesium to the
electrodes reduces the occurrence of defects in underwater welding, especially in the form of
porosity. (b) magnesium addition can change the refined grains and increase the presence acicular
ferrite which has an impact on increasing the strength and toughness of the weldment.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This research was funded by the DIPA Politeknik Negeri Jakarta through the PPT Research
Grant 2019 with contract No. 215/PL3.18/PN/2019.
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
72
REFERENCES
ABSON, D. & PARGETER, R. 1987. Factors
influencing the as-deposited strength, microstructure and toughness of manual arc welds
suitable for C-Mn steel fabrication. IIWIIS Doc. II-1092-87.
BONISZEWSKI, T. & EVANS, G. 1995a. Studies
of AWS Rutile Eectrodes. Part 3: Deoxidation with Silicon. IIW-IIS Doc. II-A-948-95.
BONISZEWSKI, T. & EVANS, G. 1995b. Studies of AWS rutile electrodes. Part 2: Changes in toughness at constant strength. IIW Doc. II-A- 940-95 (II-
A-1263-95).
BRZIAK, P., ŁOMOZIK, M., MIZUNO, R. & MATSUDA, F. 2011. Repair welding of SQV2A pressure vessel steel by temper bead techniques
without post welding heat treatment. Archives of Metallurgy and Materials, 56, 205- 216.
DE RISSONE, N. 1997. ANSI/AWS A5. 1-91
E6013 rutile electrodes: The effect of wollastonite. Cellulose, 6, 6.
DE RISSONE, N., FARIAS, J., BOTT, I. D. S. & SURIAN, E. 2002. ANSI/AWS A5. 1-
91
E6013 rutile electrodes: The effect of calcite. Cellulose, 6, 0.
ELLIOTT, K. R. & POLLACK, J. N. Underwater
Dry Chamber Aluminum Welding in Support of US Navy Ship Repair Operations
(Hyperbaric Aluminum Welding).
EVANS, G. 1980. Effect of manganese on the microstructure and properties of all-weld-metal
deposits. Welding Journal, 59, 67.
FENG, C., YANG, C.-F., HANG, S., ZHANG, Y.-
Q. & ZHOU, X. 2009. Effect of magnesium on inclusion formation in Ti-killed steels and
microstructural evolution in welding induced coarse-grained heat affected zone. Journal of Iron and
Steel Research, International, 16, 69- 74.
IBARRA, S., GRUBBS, C. & OLSON, D.
Underwater wet welding of higher strength offshore steels. Offshore Technology Conference,
1989. Offshore Technology Conference.
KOTECKI, D. 2000. A Martensite Boundary on the WRC-1992 Diagram—Part 2: The Effect of
Manganese. Welding journal, 79, s346-s354.
OLSON, D. L. 1993. ASM handbook: welding, brazing, and soldering, ASM Intl.
PESSOA, E. C. P., BRACARENSE, A. Q., DOS SANTOS, V. R., MONTEIRO, M., VIEIRA, L.
A. & MARINHO, R. R. Challenges to develop an underwater wet welding electrode for “class
A welds” classification, as required in the AWS D3. 6 code. ASM Proceedings of the
73
International Conference: Trends in Welding Research, 2013. 259.
PURNAMA, D., WINARTO, W. & SUSILO, F.
H. Mechanical properties of underwater wet welded marine steel plates using different low
hydrogen electrodes. AIP Conference Proceedings, 2018. AIP Publishing, 030015.
RAMINI DE RISSONE, N., SURIAN, E., CONDE, R. & DE VEDIA, L. 2001. Effect of
slag variations on ANSI/AWS A5. 1–91 E6013 electrode properties: replacement of TiO2 in electrode
coating with MnO, FeO, CaO, MgO, K2O, or Na2O. Science and technology of welding and joining, 6,
323-329.
ROWE, M., LIU, S. & REYNOLDS, T.
Development of SMAW coatings for underwater wet welding at specific depth ranges.
Proceedings of the 18~ Offshore Mechanics and Arctic Engineering Conference, St. John's,
Newfoundland, Canada, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1999.
SURIAN, E. 1997. ANSI/AWS E7024 SMAW
electrodes: the effect of coating magnesium additions. Welding Journal-Including Welding Research
Supplement, 76, 404s.
SURIAN, E. & DE RISSONE, N. R. 1999.
Relationships between coating composition, all weld metal properties, operational behaviour,
and diffusible hydrogen in weld metal from rutile electrodes of types ANSI/AWS A5. 1–91
E6013 and E7024. Science and technology of welding and joining, 4, 133-142.
WINARTO, W., PURNAMA, D. &
CHURNIAWAN, I. The effect of different rutile electrodes on mechanical properties of
underwater wet welded AH-36 steel plates. AIP Conference Proceedings, 2018. AIP
Publishing, 020048.
ZHU, K. & YANG, Z. 2011. Effect of Mg addition on the ferrite grain boundaries misorientation in
HAZ of low carbon steels. Journal of Materials Science & Technology, 27, 252-256.
74
75
Analysis and Design of Management Information Systems
Department of Informatics and Computer Engineering Politeknik Negeri Jakarta
Mauldy Laya, Iklima Ermis Ismail
Department of Informatics and Computer Engineering
Politeknik Negeri Jakarta [email protected], [email protected]
Keywords: analysis, design, management information systems, ict majors, fast.
Abstract: Management information system (SIM) is a system planned to collect, store and disseminate data in the
form of information needed to carry out various management functions. Management information systems
have many benefits both for management and for the organization as a whole. The benefits of Management
Information Systems can increase the efficiency and effectiveness of data accurately and realtime and make it
easier for management to do planning. At present, the institution does not yet have an information system and
application that thoroughly touches all business processes. The process starts from a student who first becomes
a new student to become an alumni. As a first step, with the support of expertise in information and
communication technology in the study program, the department's management information system will be
analyzed and designed. This research is expected to achieve the mission of the department and the institution
to become an effective, efficient and accountable institution. Analysis of the design is carried out using the
FAST (Framework for the Application of System Thinking) method in the four initial stages. In the first three
stages the results of the needs analysis are produced with PIECES as a framework for the classification of
problems, at the logical design stage generated usecase diagrams.
1 INTRODUCTION
The Department of Informatics and Computer Engineering (ICT) is a department that always aligns
its vision and mission in accordance with the vision and mission of the Jakarta State Polytechnic.
Referring to the Jakarta State Polytechnic RENSTRA, the Department of ICT also has a harmonious
vision, which wants to reach the international level in 2029 and before that it can reach the level of Asia
in 2024. While the Mission of the Department of ICT is also involved in developing effective, efficient
and accountable institutions based information and communication technology. Information and
communication technology is the core of the majors that are applied to the courses in Informatics
Engineering (IT) courses. IT Study Program produces course projects or final projects in the scope of
information systems and software applications with general or specific objectives.
At present the ICT department does not yet have an information system application that thoroughly
touches all business processes undertaken. The process starts from a student who first becomes a new
student to become an alumni. The absence of a comprehensive information system makes management
in the Department of ICT as part of supporting institutions less effective and efficient. Informatics
Engineering Study Program as a part of ICT Department is also affected by it. The study program
cannot quickly see the status of the final lecture so that it has an impact on the delay in the reporting
process.
The purpose of this research is to analyze and design a management information system as a whole.
As a first step, with the support of expertise in information and communication technology in the study
program, the department's management information system will be analyzed and designed. This
research is expected to achieve the mission of the department and the institution to become an effective,
efficient and accountable institution.
Research conducted by Hengki, et al. using the FAST model with eight stages and in carrying out
analysis and design using UML (Unified Modelling Language) tools, the results of this research are
business intelligence based on the concept of FAST (Framework for Application of System Thinking)
[1]. Research conducted by Seno Hadi Saputro, et al. discuss the influence of human resources and
external factors in the admission of new students [2]. Research conducted by Okkita Rizan and
Hamidah resulted in an application created and designed to manage and manage course schedules that
meet the desired conditions with UML modeling tools [3]. Research conducted by Afriyan, et al. It also
76
uses the FAST method to analyze problems that occur at the Faculty of Computer Science, Srwijaya
University, and uses four of the six stages of FAST [4].
2 RESEARCH METHODS
One of the system development methods commonly used for system development is the FAST
(Framework for the Application of System Thinking) method. The FAST method is a combination of
best practices in several methodologies which are packaged in an intelligent framework that is flexible
enough to provide different types of project strategies. FAST is supported by the PIECES framework
which is used to identify problems in the old system and map the existing problems based on the
categories mentioned in each letter Performance, Information, Economic, Control, Efficiency, Service
[5].
The results of the needs analysis will be modelled in the form of Unified Modelling Language which
is a standard language that is widely used in the industrial world to define needs, analysis and design, as
well as model architecture in object-oriented programming [6]. Design evaluation of the needs analysis
used is consistency analysis and correctness test. Consistency analysis is used to conduct consistency
analysis on the results of system design by utilizing the relationships between design elements. In
addition, to measure the suitability of the needs of existing business processes with system design [7].
This research uses a FAST model consisting of 8 stages, object-oriented methods, and unified
language modelling tools. Of the eight stages of the model, because this study does not discuss up to the
design level. The following 4 (four) stages are used in this research model [4]:
a. Initial Investigation Stage
At this stage, an observation is made of the ongoing conditions. Observations were also made by
analyzing the SOP documents used in the ICT Department. Observation is used to obtain data where the
data will be used to determine the initial scope of the system. Determine the problems and or
opportunities that exist in the Department of ICT so that a system can be made in accordance with
needs.
b. Problem Analysis Phase
In the second stage, an analysis of the scope of the problems found is carried out, analyzing the
problems and / or opportunities and their business processes. Determination of system development
goals is needed at this stage to determine the limits of the system to be developed. Project plans that
have been made in the first phase will be updated or changes in plans if there is a discrepancy in the
project plans in the first phase. At this stage an estimation of the time needed is also carried out.
c. Requirement Analysis Phase
In the third stage, the system requirements are defined that can answer the needs of users with what
can be produced by the new system that will be created. Analysis of functional requirements is expected
to be fulfilled by the proposed system, exploring and completing needs, prioritizing needs.
d. Logical Design Stage
At this stage, the results of the needs analysis will be translated into images called system models
such as activity diagrams, use case diagrams, package diagrams, class diagrams, deployment diagrams,
sequence diagrams, and ERD. Determination of technical requirements to help complete the proposed
system.
3 RESULT AND DISCUSSION
2.1 Initial Investigation Stage
Based on observations on the overall business processes of the Department of ICT, it was concluded
that there were three main scopes of the problem, namely: the scope of lecture and administrative
management of lectures, the scope of
document filing and correspondence, and the scope of inventory of goods belonging to the ICT
department. In each of these scopes, there are sub- problems that result in ineffective and inefficient
data and information management.
There are 11 problem statements based on the scope of the problem raised, namely: 1. The data processing of the lecturer and student attendance report on lectures is less efficient.
77
2. Accuracy in calculating the number of components and determining a Warning Letter (SP) due to student
absence is less effective.
3. Monitoring of lecture material by the Head of Study Program is less efficient.
4. Borrowing lecture infrastructure such as projectors, laboratory equipment, etc. less efficient.
5. Scheduling lectures using word processing is less effective and efficient.
6. Media information about majors in the form of Public Lectures, Socialization for PKL and Thesis, UTS /
UAS, etc. through social media is less efficient.
7. There is no integrated system for monitoring the progress of lecturer and student guidance on the
implementation of street vendors and thesis activities.
8. Management of incoming and outgoing letters at the Department of ICT is still less effective and efficient.
9. Management of student streetwork documents and thesis in digital format has not been efficient.
10. Inventory of room infrastructure in the ICT department has not been effective and efficient.
11. Inventory of laboratory equipment of the Department of ICT is still not effective.
Based on the above problems, a Management Information System is supported by Lectures and
some supporting devices. Management Information Systems will be elaborated into several sub-
systems, namely: PBM Information Subsystem ICT Department; PKL Guidance Information Subsystem
and ICT Department Thesis; Inventory and Loan Information Equipment Subsystem for ICT
Department Majors; Correspondence Information System of ICT Department; Information media
majoring in ICT.
2.2 Problem Analysis Phase
The analysis phase involves the following: analysis of problems and opportunities, analyzing
business processes, determining the causes and consequences of the problems, and determining the
goals of the system improvement and the constraints expected from the system improvement, as shown
in Table 1.
2.3 Requirement Analysis Phase
System requirements analysis consists of two, namely functional requirements and non-functional
requirements. Functional requirements consist of: a. The system must be able to provide information about the attendance reports of lecturers and students,
PBM material logs, schedules, lecture syllabus, and Lecture Events Unit (SAP).
b. The system can generate lecture schedules and search lecture schedules.
c. The system can provide information about infrastructure reports and provide features or modules for
borrowing infrastructure online.
d. The system is able to display information about the activities of the majors as well as documentation of the
activities of the ICT majors
e. The system provides information on progress reports on student guidance by supervisors at the ICT
Department.
f. The system provides information on reports of incoming and outgoing letters to the ICT Department.
g. Integrated data for all reports, so processing produces certain information more effectively.
h. There are several processes that still require validation and monitoring by Organigram (KPS, Department
Secretary and Department Chair).
Whereas non-functional needs are mapped using the PIECES matrix as shown in Table 2.
78
Table 2 Classification of Nonfunctional Needs Based on the PIECES Framework
2.4 Logical Design Stage
At this stage the usecase design of each subsystem is built that describes the activities that can be
carried out by the user on the subsystem.
Each subsystem is described in a Usecase Diagram. And each USECASE diagram involves users in
the ICT department, namely admin staff, students, lecturers, KPS, Lab heads, laboratory assistants and
thesis clerks with different authorities in each subsystem.
2.4.1 Use Case of PBM Information subsystem ICT Department
In Figure 1 is displayed usecase subsystem Information Teaching and Learning Process (PBM) in the
Department of ICT. There are four actors involved in this subsystem, namely students, lecturers, admin
staff and KPS.
At this usecase, there are six main activities, namely: the log of Teaching and Learning Process
(PBM), student attendance, lecture schedule, computation calculation and determination of Warning
Letter (SP) and management of student grades.
2.4.2 Use case of Inventory and Loan Information Equipment Subsystem ICT Department
Majors
In Figure 2 is displayed usecase Information Systems Inventory and Loan Lab Equipment
Subscriptions ICT Department. There are three actors involved in this subsystem, namely the borrower
(consisting of lecturers and students), laboratory assistants and Head of Labs.
In this usecase, there are activities that look at information on the availability of laboratory
equipment, submission of equipment or laboratory equipment borrowing by the borrower, loan approval
by the Head of Lab, and management of lab items by the laboratory assistant.
2.4.3 Use Case of Information ICT Department In Figure 3 the information usecase of ICT Information Department is displayed. There are five actors
involved in this subsystem, namely students, lecturers, admins, KPS and Head of Departments. In this
usecase, there are activities to input information by the admin and activities to view information by
students, lecturers, administrators, KPS and the Chairperson of the Department.
79
Figure 1 Use Case PBM Information subsystem ICT Department
Figure 3 Use Case Information ICT Department
Figure 2 Use case Inventory and Loan Information
Equipment Subsystem ICT Department Majors
80
Figure 4 Use case Information System Guidance for PKL Guidance and Thesis Department of ICT
2.4.4 Use case of Information System Guidance for PKL Guidance and Thesis Department of
ICT
In Figure 4 is displayed usecase Information System Guidance Subsidies PKL and Thesis Department
of ICT. There are four actors involved in this subsystem, namely students, lecturers, admin, KPS and
Thesis Committee.
At this usecase, there are activities to manage thesis data by the thesis committee, submission of
supervisors by students, approval as supervisors by lecturers and approval of student guidance and
supervisors by KPS.
2.4.5 Use Case of Information Correspondence on ICT Department
In Figure 5, the ICT Department Subsystem Information Subsystem usecase is displayed. There are
three actors involved in this subsystem, namely students / lecturers, admin and KPS.
In this usecase, there are activities to manage incoming and outgoing letters by the admin, approving
letters by KPS and submitting applications for making letters by lecturers / students.
Figure 5 Use Case: Information Correspondence on ICT Department
81
4 CONCLUSIONS
Based on the stages in the FAST method that has been carried out, it can be concluded that several
problems were found in the Department of ICT, namely in lecturing and administrative management
of lectures, archiving documents and correspondence management, and managing inventory of items
belonging to ICT departments.
To solve this problem, an integrated system design is proposed that includes managing data on
PBM, managing inventory data and lending laboratory equipment, integrated information media,
managing PKL guidance data and thesis, managing incoming and outgoing mail data.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This research is funded by the 2019 DIPA PNJ, PUPS Research Grant, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta.
REFERENCES
Hengki.2017. Business Intelligence To Support the Strategic Decisions of the Chair of the Study
Program with the FAST Model. Journal of Global Informatics Vol.8, No.1.
SH Saputro and Hengki.2016. Analysis of the Effect of Lecture Costs, Promotional Costs and
Uncontrollable Factors on the Acceptance of New Students at the STMIK Campus Atma Luhur
Pangkalpinang. Sisfokom Journal Vol. 5, No.1
Hamidah and Okkita Rizan.2016. Information System for Scheduling Lecturers of Case Study Lectures:
STMIK Atma Luhur. Journal of Technology Vol.2, No.1
Firdaus, A., Firdaus, Bardadai, A., 2010. Analysis of Lecture Management Information Systems at the
Faculty of Computer Science, Sriwijaya University. Journal of Information Systems (JSI) vol. 2,
No.2
Whitten, J. L. and Bentley, L. D., 2007. Systems Analysis and Design Methods. [e-book] New York:
McGraw- Hill. Availableat:
https://www.academia.edu/8787830/Whitten_and_Bentley_2007_System_Analysis_and_Design_M
ethods_-_7th_Edition?auto=download
Sukamto, R. A. and Shalahuddin, M., 2014. Structured and object-oriented Software Engineering. Issue
2. Bandung: Informatics.
Nistala, P., and Kumari, P., 2013. An Approach to Carry Out Consistency Analysis on Requirements.
APPENDIX
If any, the appendix should appear directly after the references without numbering, and not on a new
page.
82
Table 1 Problems, Opportunities, Objectives And Constraints Matrix
CAUSE AND EFFECT ANALYSIS SYSTEM IMPROVEMENT OBJECTIVES
PROBLEM AND
OPPORTUNITIES
CAUSE AND EFFECT SYSTEM
OBJECTIVES
SYSTEM CONSTRAINT
1. The processing of lecturer
and student attendance
report data according to
lecture schedules is less
efficient.
1. The data processing for reporting is done twice, namely
by the lecturer, then inputted by
the admin to the system, so that it
is often wrong in the process of
calculating student compents
2. Errors in the calculation of
student compents will affect
the issuance of a Warning
Letter (SP) for students
3. Lecture scheduling is still
done using word
processing, so the schedule
is obtained thoroughly and
takes longer to find
information about a
particular schedule
1. Optimization of inputting data so that it does not need to
be repeated and reduce the
potential for human error
2. Improve the efficiency of
the lecture management
system (PBM)
3. The accuracy of the
system in issuing
Commemorative Letters
(SP) for students in
accordance with the
number of hours of the
Kompen
4. Generate lecture
schedules using
algorithms so that it is
faster and more accurate
5. Time becomes more
efficient in finding
schedules for specific
lecturers or classes
1. The system must be able to provide information about the
attendance reports of lecturers and
students, PBM material logs,
schedules, lecture syllabus, lecture
event units.
2. The system is expected to be
able to save time processing
data for reporting and
producing information with
proper accuracy
3. The system can produce
lecture schedules in
accordance with specified
constraints.
4. The system can display the
selection features for a specific
schedule based on the search
for lecturers, classes and
courses.
2. Borrowing lecture
infrastructure such as
projectors, laboratory
equipment, etc. less
efficient.
1. The process of borrowing
infrastructure is done in
writing, so that for inventory
reporting done repeatedly, there
is no information regarding the
availability of infrastructure.
1. Availability of
information on
infrastructure, loan
processes documented
online.
2. Time efficiency in the
process of borrowing
infrastructure
1. The system can provide information
on the availability of infrastructure
and provide features or modules for
loaning infrastructure online before
it is approved by the Head of Lab.
3. Information media about ICT department agendas
in the form of Public
Lectures, Socialization
for PKL and Thesis, UTS
/ UAS, etc. through social
media is less efficient
1. Submission of information about ICT department activities has
not been distributed centrally, so
the information received is also
uneven
1. Being a centralized media for the delivery of
information about the
activities of the ICT
department
1. The system is able to display information about the activities of
the majors as well as the
documentation of the activities of
the ICT majors
4. There is no integrated system for monitoring the
progress of the guidance
of lecturers and students
in the implementation of
street vendors and thesis
activities
1. Documentation of student
guidance by the supervisor is still
done in writing, so for progress
reporting the guidance is done
repeatedly
2. The Head of the Study
Program (KPS) has
difficulty in monitoring the
progress of student guidance by the supervisor
1. Optimization of inputting
student guidance data by the
supervisor
2. Efficiency of monitoring
the progress of guidance
by KPS
1. The system provides the
student guidance feature by the
online supervisor
2. The system provides a feature
of recording the results of
student guidance by the
supervisor.
3. The system can display the
number of meetings or student guidance with the supervisor
5. Management of incoming
and outgoing letters at the
Department of ICT is still
less effective and efficient
1. The process of managing
incoming and outgoing
letters is still in writing, so
that the filing time and
waiting time for the letter is
longer
2. Often there are errors or
human errors in writing
letters
1. Time efficiency in the
process of managing
incoming and outgoing
letters
2. Accuracy in the process
of inputting data needed
on incoming and
outgoing letters
1. The system provides features
for submitting certain types of
letters
2. The system has a letter
template that suits the needs of
the ICT department.
3. The system provides
information about the progress
or progress of incoming and
outgoing letters
83
DEVELOPMENT OF ENGLISH WRITING SKILLS OF FKPPI RAYON
CIMANGGIS MEMBERS, DEPOK, JAWA BARAT
Endang Purwaningrum1, Ina Sukaesih2
Business and Professional Study Program, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta, Kampus Barui UI, Depok 16425
Email : [email protected], 2 [email protected]
Abstract This English Language Business Letter Writing Training aims to improve English written
communication skills in the business world for FKPPI teenagers Rayon Cimanggis. Business letter is one of the
keys to success in developing business in an increasingly globalized world. The English-language business letter
writing is very different from the Indonesian-language business letter, both in form and expressions. To prepare
young people to be able to participate in welcoming the global economy, English-language business letter writing
skills are needed. The mastery of English business letter writing skills is the basis of support for those who want to
open a global business and be able to create their own business as an entrepreneur. FKPPI members are military
teenage boys and girls who must master the skills that are needed by the global community. The results of this study
indicate that all respondents gave answers. 85% of respondents gave correct answers to 18 questions, 15% of
respondents gave correct answers, but only to 16 questions ... There are 2 (two) questions that are somewhat
incorrect answers when respondents are asked to provide responses that must prepare themselves and about their
opinions in welcoming the revolution era 4.0. With this research and training it is expected that they will be able to
welcome and compete in business with a global scope.
Keywords: business letter, global scope, FKPPI, skills, revolution 4.0.
INTRODUCTION
From the experience of similar activities carried out from year to year, it is still impressed that the writing of
business letters is still not well mastered by adolescents, especially adolescents who are members of the sons and
daughters of the Indonesian National Army or abbreviated FKPPI Rayon Cimanggis. The dilemma faced by
people who do not use English in their daily lives, especially in writing business letters, is the image that writing
business letters in English is not easy.
On the one hand, the global economy is already a challenge and opportunity for business activists, but on the other
hand business activists are not really ready to face it. When a business activist develops his business to become
globalized, several conditions that support success need to be owned and / or pursued.
One of the conditions for success in global business is communication in English, both oral and written. In the
field of writing one of them is a business letter. Why business letters are more important than verbal talks?
Because first, business letters are authentic evidence of all transactions from the initial stage to the end of the
business process. Second, with a business letter a business activist will have more time to consider the best steps
that can be explained in writing. Therefore mastery of writing business letters is a necessary skill in the global
business arena.
From preliminary research on business letters in English and in Indonesian it can be concluded that there are
differences between lay-outs and expressions that are commonly used. For example, the placement of matters in
Indonesian language letters is used to being placed above, while in English letters it is usually placed after the
opening greeting. Then in terms of expressions that are used, in Indonesian, for example for the closing phrase
often used the phrase: "so and for the attention of Mother / Father ".
Such expressions do not exist in English Business letters so the writer must correctly know and use the exact
expression that is accepted and understood by the reader. FKPPI, as the subject of community service activities
carried out, is an organization which is a union of sons and daughters of the Indonesian National Army which
many of its members are potential teenagers. They are one of the young generation who will fill the development
of the nation and state of the Republic of Indonesia. For this reason, this activity is a very appropriate activity.
This activity is planned for 4 months with study hours twice a week. Background Targeted education, on average
is high school and tertiary level, so they really need the skills to write business letters in English. Looking at
84
their educational background, they already have the English language skills needed to do business English
letters.
Writing English business letters is very useful for young people, especially young people who are members of
the FKPPI Rayon Cimanggis, because they equip them with skills that are indispensable in order to be able to
compete in an increasingly globalized world.
After completing the expected activities, FKPPI youths Rayon Cimanggis not only knew how to write business
letters in English, but were also able to practice writing business letters and conduct interviews in English as
their skills to be able to compete.
Through this activity, it is expected to improve the ability of the trainees in making business letters and
conducting interviews in English.
LITERATURE REVIEW
An English-language business letter is a trait that must be mastered by the younger generation to prepare
themselves as a part of the Industrial Revolution 4.0, likes it or not, will govern life. To do it, an English business
letter issued to have training in writing job application letters, Curriculum Vitae or Resumes and job interview
training, plus knowledge about the use of social media for success in applying for work.
In revolution 4.0, all parties, whether entrepreneurs, or employees face intense competition. Delivered by Nur
Chandra Laksana. Further more he states that the issue of the industrial revolution 4.0 needs serious attention so
we can prepare ourselves to answer the challenge. Competent resources are one of the main factors determining
the success of the transformation of the 4.0 era, therefore improving the quality of human resources (HR) needs
to be prioritized.
Daniel Mashudi also stated that the Indonesian government through the existing ministries will continue to boost
the quality of human resources in Indonesia in 2019. The Ministry of Manpower, for example, continues to carry
out HR development programs such as apprenticeship, optimization of training and certification that will be
maximized and disseminated massively to face the era of 4.0.
The era of globalization with the industrial revolution 4.0 is an inevitable necessity. For that, all elements of the
nation, especially human resources must be prepared because if we do not prepare ourselves, it is potential that
we will sink into the shadows of other nations. We do not want it happens to our nation.
From some of the opinions mentioned above, then various types of training, one of which is training to prepare
skills is needed, even prioritized. Business letter writing training in English is one of the answers to community
empowerment so as not to sink into the shadows of the progress of other nations. Politeknik Negeri Jakarta
together with FKPPI Rayon Cimanggis prepare for it and ready to compete in this globalized world.
METHODOLOGY
The research technique used is the field survey method (field research) where researchers jump directly into the
field. The approach used is a qualitative approach with the aim that it can clearly describe the reality that exists in
the community members, especially members of FKPPI Rayon Cimanggis as a subject of community service and
research at the same time. Not all the sons and daughters of the TNI who are members of the FKPPI are
participating because of the limited time and distance of their residence, which affects communication. The
population is a member of the Depok Branch of FKPPI, while the sample is taken from one of the Rayon owned
by the Depok branch, namely Rayon Cimanggis. The data used in this study are primary data obtained through
interviews using questionnaires conducted directly face to face between interviewers and interviewees to ensure
the questionnaire is answered and answers are obtained directly. So the trainers do not wait for respondents to
return the questionnaire distributed. Whereas secondary data was obtained from library studies by taking some
books as sources or literature related to training material. Data analysis techniques using descriptive qualitative
methods. Descriptive qualitative was chosen because it can provide with a real picture that matches the facts in
the field. To test the validity of the data, source triangulation techniques are used. The technique used to compare
data from different sources with the same technique.
RESULT AND DISCUSSION
The FKPPI members are the potential millenial generation. They have high discipline life, loyalty is their motto,
so they are the right subject to be the participants and respondents of this research and training. The chosen
85
Cimanggis region FKPPI members for this training and research are the members who has finished their senior
high school and some members are university students on their first semester.
Based on the entry selection given (the entry selection was done by taking the candidate score or mark of their
English in their semester report in senior high school) to the participant candidate, it is found that the level of the
participants knowledge about writing English business letter needs to be developed.
After given a training and questioners about the training, the result is that all participants answer all questions
correctly. For 20 questions given, there are 85% of the respondents answer correctly for 18 questions. The rest
15% answered correctly for 16 items of 20 questions. Some of the respondents stated that they felt difficult to
answer last two questions asking about their idea of rev.4.0. It is caused by their knowledge about rev.4.0 still very
limited.
The trainer gave an opportunity to the participants a discussion by email. This is done because of the limited time
had by the participants and the trainers. In about twice a week for 4 months we had an online training and
discussions to guide the participants and discuss their written production in writing English business letter. The
result of this 4 (four) months guided training is that participants are able to write English business letter well, that
is focused on writing resume, application letter and English interview. The participants never got such English
training before, so they feel that this training is very important and useful for them. That is why they ask for the
next training for them.
CONCLUSION
The conclusion of this research and training of writing English business letter is very useful for the millennial
generation of FKPPI Cimanggis region. It is stated that it is skill needed by participants. Even, they ask for
another training in the future as the continuation, such as writing other kind of Business letter and Conversation.
Because they feel that such kind of training is very important but it is difficult for them to get partner as a trainer.
SUGGESTION
Here are some suggetions given by participants :
1. The training should be given once in a year for them, as it is very useful. The FKPPI organization ask for
the yearly agenda for them. :
2. The training should be the sustainable training and the materials for the training should be continued
with the next materials.
REFERENCES
Buku pedoman penelitian dan pengabdian edisi 11 Renstra PNJ dan renstra P3M
Medikawati, Yuli., S.E., M.M., ‘Pedoman Lengkap membuat surat-surat bisnis’. Gramedia, 2018.
https://www.tek.id/tek/apa-itu-industri-4-0-dan-bagaimana-indonesia-menyongsongnya- b1Xbl9d4L
https://www.kompasiana.com/danielmashudi/5c2f217143322f1bad375914/revolusi- industri-4-0-dan-
pentingnya-pengembangan-sumber-daya-manusia- indonesia?page=all#
86
87
SCIENCE AND INSTITUTIONAL DEVELOPMENT RESEARCH
ONLINE-BASED ENTREPRENEURSHIP MOTIVATION ON WOMEN
ENTREPRENEURS IN JABODETABEK
Eva Zulfa
email: [email protected] Politeknik Negeri Jakarta, Jl. Prof.
G.A. Siwabessy Kampus UI Depok
Abstract: In the current era of the Industrial Revolution 4.0, online-based entrepreneurial activities are
very attractive to women. In fact, young millennial women dominate it more. This money-making activity is very
attractive to women because it can make women beautiful, stylish and prosperous. Besides that, it can help the
family economy and continue to study. Activities that are very easy and simple to carry out can be started with
very little capital. Laptops and internet connections are enough to start this online business. In fact, by only using
cellphones (hand phones) plus internet credits which are very popular, this entrepreneurship can be started. This
research was conducted with a qualitative descriptive approach, by filling in the questionnaire and conducting a
study of the literature and documents relevant to the research. The population in this study are women
entrepreneurs who are classified as micro and small businesses (MSMEs) with the respondents being women
entrepreneurs who use online in Jakarta and surrounding areas.
Keywords: women entrepreneurship, online business, motivation, entrepreneurship
1. INTRODUCTION
The era of the industrial revolution 4.0 is marked by the rapid development of science and
technology, especially in the field of communication technology. This has a profound impact and
influence on human life, especially in the field of business and business. Life is made easier by the
support of digital technology, especially services becoming faster and more efficient because it is
supported by an increasingly broad range of internet connections and online systems in various
fields. Therefore, entrepreneurs must be able to see business opportunities that arise along with the
development of information technology, and use them to spur productivity and improve business
efficiency.
The era of the industrial revolution 4.0 has brought opportunities and challenges for women
to increase income by engaging in the business world as entrepreneurs. In this day and age it does not
require a woman to leave home and family to be able to run a business. However, these opportunities
also require women entrepreneurs to understand how to use these technologies in order to continue to
maintain the sustainability of their business.
Considering the important role of women entrepreneurs in the economy, and for efforts to
foster women entrepreneurs on target, the government and educational institutions, as well as all
relevant parties, really need to understand everything related to women entrepreneurs in the current
digital era, what is the motivation that motivates them to entrepreneurship, obstacles, challenges they
face in running their business, especially in facing the current digital era.
Jakarta State Polytechnic as an educational institution which is expected to produce strong
entrepreneurs, of course needs to always develop its educational curriculum, especially in
Entrepreneurship courses. This research is expected to provide valuable input for the development of
the curriculum and also for institutions or parties involved in fostering MSMEs and empowering
women.
This is what prompted the author to conduct this research, and based on the description
above, the author formulated the problem as follows:
1. What factors motivate women entrepreneurs to become entrepreneurs?
2. What factors are the most dominant motivating women entrepreneurs to become entrepreneurs?
3. What obstacles did they face in the 4.0 industrial revolution?
88
2. RESEARCH METHODS
This study uses a qualitative approach that is descriptive because it fits the purpose of this study,
which is to get a complete and in-depth picture of the phenomenon under study. Descriptive method
was chosen because this study aims to gather information about real situations that are ongoing. One
reason for using this method is that the data collected is considered very useful in helping us to adjust
or can solve problems that arise in everyday life (Consuelo in Siambaton, 2005). This is in
accordance with the objectives of this study, namely to obtain information about entrepreneurial
motivation, influencing factors, and challenges faced by women entrepreneurs.
The study was conducted in Jakarta and surrounding areas. Respondents in this study are women
entrepreneurs who run their business in the city of Jakarta and surrounding areas. They are relatively
young entrepreneurs and generally run their businesses using internet connections.
Information gathering is done by using an open list of questions to gather as much information as
possible about various matters relating to the entrepreneurial motivations of these women
entrepreneurs. Data validation is done through triangulation techniques using various data sources,
theories, methods, so that data and information can be interpreted consistently. Therefore to
understand and find answers to research questions, researchers can use more than one theory, more
than one method (interview, observation, and document analysis). (Indrawan and Yaniawati, 2014)
The process of data analysis is done by examining all data collected, data reduction, and making
abstractions or summaries. Furthermore, the summary is arranged in units grouped by making codes
to get a picture of the theme under study. The theme can at least describe phenomena, and maximally
allow the interpretation of phenomena (Purwandari in Siambaton, 2005). Then the data analysis is
done by conducting the process of interpreting the data and drawing conclusions.
3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Respondent Data
The number of respondents from the study were 56 people, all of whom were women. Respondents
are entrepreneurs by using internet facilities (online). Most of them had high school education
(69.6%) while 40.4% of tertiary institutions consisted of 21.4% with a diploma degree and 9% with
an undergraduate degree. Their status is mostly unmarried (89.3%) with entrepreneurial activities
89.3% still under 2 years.
Entrepreneurship is an activity that reflects independence and creativity. Therefore, its activities
are increasing in today's society. Because, activities that make money can be started with small
capital and can be done on a home scale. So young women can nail it while school
/ college. Similarly, mothers can do it while taking care of the house, supervising and
accompanying their children, and finally making money for family income.
Viral opinions in the community, not a few who say that living in today's difficult all difficult.
Especially since the financial crisis hit our country. As a result, finding work is difficult, buying
things from fuel to groceries is also twisted because of the exorbitant price. Therefore, so people
today must have a high level of struggle. Families must tighten their financial management, if they
don't want to be disastrous. Disasters lurk not only through the universe, but also in other aspects such
as health, education and livelihoods, and all of them affect welfare.
The old paradigm says that the husband (head of the family) is the backbone of welfare in the
household. At present, such an assumption is thrown away. This can be proven by the opinion of
Respondents who state that entrepreneurial activities are self-serving (92.8%) with the aim of helping
family finances (92.9%). All components in the household have responsibilities and obligations to
support their families towards prosperity in accordance with the abilities of each member. Every
family member has a strategy to fight for the welfare of all its members. Therefore it is not surprising
89
that the respondent's activities are supported by many families (57.1%).
Basically, the degree between male and female is the same. So far, we see men as if they have a
higher degree, so they are often positioned in the highest position as well. However, the
circumstances in which women can also do the same thing. In fact, many women now serve as bosses
in companies and supervise male employees. In the business world, both men and women, both are
believed to be able to bring business to a better direction. Provided that both have a strong
determination to advance the business. Online Based Women Entrepreneurs’ Motivation
Women not only increase spending, but also income figures. Statistics show that 60% of 85.4
million workers in the MSME sector are women. With the development of women's MSMEs, not
only has an impact on the socio-economic improvement of millions of households in Indonesia, but
also significant job creation.
Money is an inseparable part of everyday human life. Money is needed to buy various necessities
and many of them are struggling to get it (entrepreneurship). For women, money can be beautiful,
stylish and can continue to improve (wealthy) well-being. While entrepreneurship can provide inner
satisfaction. This is because the business does without orders or orders from a superior. Entrepreneurs
are free to be creative in realizing their businesses. Success in running an entrepreneur increases self-
confidence and gives a sense of self-actualization for the person who runs it. Therefore, it is not
surprising that entrepreneurship (having a lot of money) for women can be self-pride (71.4%), elevate
social status (74.1%) and gain life in a more confident community (92.9%).
The education factor becomes two blades if related to entrepreneurship. Education provides
provisions to improve business knowledge, but to take education itself also requires time. This is
what also causes most women to start a business since they were 25-44 years old. Because higher
education, for example up to level two, was only completed at that age. 74.1% of respondents stated
that high education is needed in starting a business. It turns out that in an online business is not the
case, because the problems they face are very easy and simple as stated by 98.2% of respondents who
only have SLA. The purpose of this is simple and easy because there is no need to display products
physically, but it is enough to provide a catalog with a brief but concise description of each product.
In addition, it will not require accreditation letters and other certificates. In fact, do not have work
experience and do not have any certification can still have the opportunity to succeed in running a
business on the internet.
Entrepreneurial activities can reflect economic independence and creativity (89.3%). Activities that
generate money do not require large capital and can be done on a home scale. So mothers can do it
while taking care of the house, supervise and accompany their children, and finally make money for
family income. Online business can be run with very little capital, even without capital. No need to
rent a place of business, no need to buy expensive equipment, and various other needs that are usually
needed in real business. Online business can be done anywhere as long as there is a laptop or
computer and an internet connection. You can even start by just using a cell phone (cell phone).
Online business people are very interested in many models and the speed of transactions on this
type of entrepreneurship, especially for beginners. This business person can make money from
various media starting from bog, social media, marketplace, etc. By capitalizing on a blog, these
business people can make a lot of money such as becoming a google adsense publisher or by selling
their own products. Therefore, it is natural that they are very interested in being able to channel their
academic abilities or skills (100%). As for the speed of the transaction can be one of the determining
factors for the success of a business. 60.7% of respondents are willing to use funds for this business.
Barriers to Online-Based Women's Entrepreneurship
Competition is an online business challenge that must always be considered because they can have
products and displays in the form of better and more attractive promotions, lower prices, etc. Various
types of competitors, including fellow entrepreneurs who have long been active online, entrepreneurs
who have just emerged and many official stores that directly market their goods to consumers.
90
Industry application 4.0 changes very quickly. Therefore, if online businesses do not / lack formal
learning about online business application materials, it will have an impact on difficulties in
competency because of their inability to utilize this technology to the fullest. The toughest stage in a
business is between the point when it was first established until the time the business starts to be
established. At this stage, the owner must focus most of his attention on the business. If not, to reach
established stage (business), it will be difficult and require more time. In Indonesia, early stage
business activity (earlystage entrepreneurial activity) is actually mostly done at the age of 25-44
years. In fact, at that age, ideally someone has married. As a result, the focus is easily fragmented.
There is a phenomenon that causes 'turmoil' for women in business, namely the nature as a woman
herself. Social and cultural norms, explicitly or not, encourage women to get married and become
mothers at a certain age. After that, women will also have new responsibilities, namely as a
housewife.
For online business beginners, the capital required is relatively small but after starting to develop it
requires a large enough capital even though not as big as real business. Capital is often a problem,
especially for business people who do not have collateral such as housing certificates, land etc.
Because until now, the Bank only provides loans to those who have collateral.
4. CONCLUSIONS
Online-based entrepreneurship women on MSME scale are dominated by millennial women under
the age of 20, single status with high school education. His interest in this activity was due to his
fondness for using anroid phones that barely knew the time and place. Therefore, it is natural that
they are increasingly interested in internet applications that make money easily, simply, and cheaply.
As a result, they can look beautiful, stylish and prosperous as women generally dream so they can
appear confidently. In addition, it can help family finances and still be able to continue their studies.
This prestigious business actor, besides the most influential / dominant motivations as mentioned
above, is also due to inner satisfaction, independence, and creativity. Inner satisfaction with being
free, working without being ordered by people (superiors), working without adrift of time and place,
freedom to innovate without dependence on others, as well as freedom in executing / deciding on a
matter related to a business affair (independence). The obstacle most feared by entrepreneurs is
competition. The form of competition is not only increasing in number, both old and new
entrepreneurs but also more attractive appearance, more quality types of products, lower prices, etc.
Based on the strengths, weaknesses, and obstacles of online-based entrepreneurship, th en for
Beginners will have an idea of the chances of success in running it. But on the other hand there is
something to watch out for, online business is not a get-rich-quick business, it must be successful.
Such thinking / imagination is wrong because entrepreneurship on the internet requires time, patience,
focus, does not stop learning and not instant.
REFERENCES
Austhi, Deby. (2017). Motivasi Berwirausaha dan Kesuksesan Berwirausaha pada Wirausahawan
Wanita Anne Avantie. Jurnal Agora Vol 5. No 1 Barani, G. dan Dheepa, T. (2013). Influence of
Motives and its Impact on Women Entrepreneurs of India. Journal of Entrepreneurship and
Management, Vol. 2. (2017)
Hapsari Ghozie, Putri (2019), Cantik, Gaya dan Tetap Kaya , PT Gramedia, Jakarta
Indrawan, Rully. Yaniawati, Poppy (2014). Metodologi Penelitian. Journal, Refika Aditama,
Bandung.
91
Jesurajan, S. Vargheese Antony & M.Edwin Gnanadhas. (2011). A Study On The Factors
Motivating Women To Become Entrepreneurs in Tirunelveli District. Asian Journal of Business and
Economics, Vol. 1 No. 1, 1-14.
Kasali Rhenald, Disruption, (Jakarta: Gramedia Pustaka utama 2017 Kusuma, Shinta. (2018).
Mompreneurship. Charissa Publisher.
Nadire, Yimamu. (2018). Enterpreneurship anda Entrepreneurial Motivation. Centria University Of
Applied Sciences Business Management.
https://biz.kompas.com/read/2017/05/16/093800628/pemerintah.dorong.pert
umbuhan.jumlah.wi rausaha.perempuan.di.indonesia.
https://lifestyle.kompas.com/read/2018/11/09/203330620/ketakutan-
dari-dalam-diri- penghambat-majunya-bisnis-wanita
92
93
UNFORTUNATELY LIMITED
Ina Sukaesih1 Politeknik Negeri Jakarta [email protected]
Endang Purwaningrum2 Politeknik Negeri Jakarta [email protected]
Septina Indrayani3 Politeknik Negeri Jakarta [email protected]
Abstract
The research addresses how Sundanese terms of address are translated into English. It
discusses specifically the translation techniques practiced by the translator and the quality of the
translation. The research materials are taken from Sundanese short stories and their translation in
English. The theories applied are Molina Albir for translation techniques and Nababan, et.al for
translation quality. The analyses are carried out using Spreadly methods, i.e. domain, taxonomy,
componential and culture findings. The results show that there are five translation techniques
practiced by the translator, Established equivalent, pure borrowings, deletion, variation, and
implicitation. The translation quality appears to gain 2.5 as a whole. This score means that the
translation is quite good. While the translation accuracy takes the highest score of 2.7, followed by
acceptability and readability having 2.08. It is also found out that choice of words in the target
language, English is not so rich that it is difficult to avoid borrowing terms from the source text.
Keywords: terms of address, Sundanese, English, translation techniques, translation quality
1. Introduction
Terms of address are considered as honorifics. These occur in many languages especially
the ones come from a high-context culture like Asian languages. Sundanese as one of the languages
from a high-context culture has this type of honorifics. Most of the terms of address in Sundanese
are meant to show deference and comradeship as a representation of power and distance. These two
aspects of sociolinguistics also exist in English although it has a different background of language
as it comes from low-context culture. Having different language backgrounds, this article will
reveal how English terms of address cater for the ones from Sundanese.
2. Literary Review
Terms of address are defined as words or phrases which are used to address people to
attract people’s attention, to show politeness, and to reveal social status. (Esmae’li, 2011) These
terms of address are used both in oral and written communication. However these terms may be
changed in different situations, for example, a friend may call us our nickname at home but using
the deferential title in the office. It works the same in Sundanese, terms of address are used to show
deference and comradeship. In this investigation, terms of address only referred to vocatives, how
people address another directly and orally. To show deference, the terms Bapak may be shortened to
Pak, Ibu shortened to Bu. They were usually used for people someone respects and maybe both in a
94
formal and informal situation without taking age into account. These also are impacts of power and
distance (Qin, 2008) where people who have higher social status may be respected, and people who
have just met may also be addressed politely. Then it may be said that terms of address showing
politeness are used either when there is a difference in social status or when the interlocutors are
strangers. (Qin, 2008)
The following are common Sundanese terms of address found to be practiced nowadays and the
English version.
No. Indicated Person Polite forms Intimate English
(Subject+(Object)
1 First person/speaker Abdi, Sim kuring, Bapak,
Ibu, Akang,
Eneng, Nyai, Ujang
Kuring, uing, aing,
urang, Akang, Eneng,
Nyai, Ujang
I, We+me, us
2. Second
person/speaker Anjeun, Bapak, Ibu Maneh, sia, silaing You, Sir, Madam,
Mr./Mrs./Miss./Ms.
Doctor, Professor
3. Third person/speaker Anjeuna, Bapak….,
Ibu….., Nyi….,
Neng…., Jang….
Manehna, Bapak….,
Ibu….., Nyi….,
Neng…., Jang….
She, he+her,him
The theory related to the translation techniques practiced by the translator is based on the
one proposed by Molina&Albir which breaks down them into 18 techniques. And the translation
quality is evaluated and measured using the Translation Quality assessment proposed by Nababan.,
et.al.
The purpose of this study is, firstly to find out the linguistic units of the terms of address
used in some Sundanese short stories; secondly to find out the classification of the terms of address;
thirdly, it investigates the translation techniques exercised by the translator, and finally it analyzed
the translation quality of the terms of address.
3. Data and Research Methodology
The data are taken from several short stories entitles Angin Puyuh (The Whirlwind), Macet
(Traffic Jam), Bangsat (The Swine), and Murid Kuring (The boy in my class) collected in Neng
Maya and Miss Maya, a collection of Sundanese short stories in Sundanese and English published
by Kiblat in 2014. (Watsons, 2014; Watsons, 2014) The classification of terms of address in English
follows the patterns proposed by Richards J. Watts (Watts, 2003) which distributes the terms of
address into 4 classifications, namely: first name, deferential title, title+last name, first+last name.
While the classification in Sundanese refers to the theory proposed by Yayat Sudaryat. The terms of
address in Sundanese are also used to show politeness as an effect of respect and intimacy. As
Sundanese has a speech level system, the category of terms of address also follows the pattern.
Terms of address showing respect are resulted from the existence of different power and far
distance between the speakers, while the ones showing intimacy are from similar power and closed
distance.
Data gathered from the sources were recorded and classified based on the-afore mentioned
theory. Content analysis was carried out on the data to categorize data to non-data. From this step,
the data were analyzed to obtain the translation techniques and translation quality by a group of
95
raters in focus group discussion. Finally, the data were analyzed implementing the data analysis
proposed by Spreadly which follows the steps: domain, taxonomy, componential and finding
culture. (Santosa, 2017)
4. Results and Discussion
4.1 Sub-classification of Terms of Address
From the 73 terms of address found in the source text, it is revealed that there are three sub-
classification of the terms of address, namely comradely, first name and deferential title. Comradely
dominates in terms of quantity as it amounts to 48 usages; it is followed by the usage of the first
name amounted to 15, and the least is deferential title amounting to ten usages. The following table
shows the data.
Table 1. ToA Classification and Translation Techniques
NO. ToA Classification Data Number TT Total
Number
1 Comradely 48 PL 25
PM 15
Deletion 7
Variation 1
2 First Name 15 PL 5
PM 10
3 Deferential Title 10 PL 4
Variation & Implicitation
3
PM 2
Variation 1
73 76
The dominating usage of comradely may be seen as the effect of the context of the stories
which are a mystery (Whirlwind), daily life experience (The Traffic Jam and The boy in my class),
and adultery (The Swine). The characters involved also give a quite big impact on the usage of
comradely. In Whirlwind, the characters are big brothers and sisters whose relationship can be
predicted as intimate. The usage of ‘Akang’ and ‘Nyai’ as the terms of address shows that there is
no power and distance between them, and this leads to the use of comradely. In The traffic jam, the
characters are husband and wife, and a driver-friend. This has the same context as the characters in
the first short story have a similar context and relationship. There are neither distance nor power
which may take effect on other usages of terms of address except comradely. The word ‘jikan’
shortened from pamajikan shows a close relationship between the couple. In The boy in my class,
the relationship between teachers is represented by the usage of terms of address ‘Ayi’( a personal
pronoun for little sister or brother in polite category). This is used to show respect as of the effect of
the context, i. e. a school circumstance. In the Swine, the story takes place in a village where the
relationships among the members are very close, and the characters are members of a neighborhood.
The address of Akang used by a wife to a husband and among friends showing different ages also
shows intimacy which represents comradeship.
96
4.2 Translation Techniques
From the table, it is seen five translation techniques are used by the translator to transfer the
terms of address from Sundanese into English. The technique of Established Equivalent (EE) is
dominating which leads to the highest translation quality. This technique is applied in 25 comradely
sub-classification terms of address, 4 first name, and deferential title. It is evidenced that all data
practicing EE obtain the highest score of 3. Beside EE, the technique of Pure Borrowing (PB) is
used by 15 data, this technique also gives a positive impact on the aspect of accuracy. However, it
negatively affects the aspects of acceptability and readability. Using PB, there will not be any
meaning distortion as the message is directly transferred to the target text. While the source text will
not probably match the norms and rules of the target language, and it is not familiar with the target
text readers. Therefore it is understandable that the scores for acceptability and readability are low.
The translation technique of Deletion automatically gives a negative impact on translation quality,
while the implicitation technique gives a positive impact. On the other hand, the variation technique
which may vary in the impact on translation quality, in this investigation it is revealed that it brings
positive impact. This occurs, in my opinion, because of the translator competency in his English
language.Translation Quality
The following componential table shows all the elements in this research article. It
represents all the components discussed in the research.
Table 2. Terms of Address (ToA) Classification, Translation Techniques and Translation Quality
NO. ToA
Classification
Data
Number
TT
Translation Quality TQ
Accu
racy
Accept
ability
Reada
bility
Average
1 Comradely 48 PL , PM,
Deletion,
Variation
2.68 2.04 2.06 2.36
2 First Name 15 PL , PM 3 1.6 1.6 2.32
3 Deferential
Title
10 PL , Variation
&
Implicitation,
PM, Variation
3 2.6 2.6 2.8
Total 73 2.89 2.08 2.08 2,49
From the table, it can be seen that the sub-classification of comradely gains a score of
2.68 for its accuracy. This score can be interpreted that almost all terms of address have been
accurately transferred into the target language. Barely there is no error in the translation, while the
accuracy in the translation of a first name and deferential title is perfect which means that all terms of
address are translated perfectly. These probably resulted from the translation techniques of PL and
PM. They have contributed to the accuracy of the translation. The final result of the accuracy is also
high, which is 2.89 of 3.
The result of the acceptability shows a bit different, specifically for the first name. It can be
seen that it gets 1.6 which means that it is not good. The score, i.e. 1.6 tells us that a part of the
words in the translation may not conform to the target language rules and regulation and are not
97
familiar in the target language. This may also result from the PM translation technique in which
source words are directly transferred into the target text. Those words are certainly not familiar with
the target text. As we may see that in each sub-classification beside Deletion, PM is found, and this
I believe has contributed to the low score of acceptability aspect.
From the readability point of view, we may see that there is no significant difference in
score. It may be blamed on the use of PM. And that is normal, as target readers may not be familiar
with the terms of address from the source language.
However, contribution given from all the three aspects of translation quality has resulted in
2.49 which may be interpreted that most of the terms of address have been successfully transferred
into target text although meaning distortion can still be found and sourced terms of address still
exist. This result may be caused by several factors. It can be seen from the competency of the
translator, the incompatibility of the terms of address and the readers’ comprehension of the
translation.
5. Conclusion
From the discussion and review from the previous parts, it may be concluded that the terms
of address practiced by the authors of the short stories are only comradely, first name, and
deferential title. There are five translation techniques used, namely Established Equivalent, Pure
Borrowings, Deletion, Variation, and Implicitation. These have contributed positively to the quality
of the translation which is shown in the highest score of 2. 5 which can be interpreted that most of
the terms of address have been translated successfully. Besides the technical factors, the
competency of the translator is also crucial and looking at the high translation quality, it may be
concluded that the translator is also successful and has good competency in translating.
Bibliografi
Esmae’li, S. (2011). Terms of Address Usage: the Case of Iranian Spouses. International Journal
of Humanities and Social Science, 183-188.
Qin, X. (2008). Choices in Terms of Address: A Sociolinguistic Study of Chinese and American
English Practices. Proceedings of the 20th North American Conference on Chinese
Linguistics, 409-421.
Santosa, R. (2017). Metode Penelitian Bahasa. Surakarta: UNS Press.
Watts, R. J. (2003). Politeness. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
98
99
Investigation of Grain Boundary Corrosion and Crack on Stainless
Steel A316 Processed by EDM Die – Sinker for Food and Medicines
Dies and Punches
Muslimin1, Lishbet Engelita1, Sonki Prasetya1, Pribadi Mumpuni Adhi1 and Hasvienda M. Ridlwan1 1Department of Mechanical Engineering, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta, Jl. Prof. Dr. Siwabessy-Kampus UI, Depok, Indonesia
Keywords: Dies and punch, AISI 316 food grade, Sinker EDM, machining parameters, smoothness
Abstract: Medicine and food are often processed in tablets using dies and punches. The material of dies and
punches for this purpose must be hard, high fatigue strength, wear-resistant, and corrosion-
resistant. The material is also not reactive during contact with ingredients and specific
environments to meet health standards. Stainless-steel such as A316 meets these criteria.
However, due to the complicated forms of dies and punches, the conventional machining cannot
be applied to process the material. Therefore, the sinker EDM (electrical discharge machining)
process is chosen. EDM is non-conventional machining that uses spark energy with a large electric
current density for metal cutting. EDM is strongly influenced by process parameters including
discharge current, pulse-on-time, servo sensitivity, and electrode material. These parameters
affect the smoothness of the dies and punch surfaces as well as corrosion of grain boundaries and
cracks both on the surface and below the surface (second layer). Corrosion and crack appearing on
dies and punches will affect the lifetime of tools and medicine and food processed. This research
aims to find the appropriate EDM parameters to avoid grain boundary corrosion and crack. Based
on the result, discharge current and electrode material give significant effect to grain boundary
corrosion and crack.
1. INTRODUCTION
A compacting process using dies and punch is widely applied for medicinal and food processing
to form tablets (Mohan 2012) (Bare et al. 2011). Dies and punches should have high smoothness
quality and free from corrosion and crack to ensure health perquisite. Rough surfaces of dies and
punches can trap drug or food particles which able to be the toxic source (expired and corrosion
drugs or foods). Dies and punches for drugs and food must meet health safety standards because
of the equipment able to produce a chemical reaction with medicinal or food ingredients so that a
negative impact on the product is yielded.
Regulation of the Head of the Republic of Indonesia Medicine and Food Supervisory Agency
(BPOM RI) Number HK.03.1.33.12.12.8195 of 2012 concerning the Application of Guidelines
for the Manufacture of Good Drugs in Chapter 4 of Equipment, especially in Item 4.2 and Item
4.7 regulating:
4.2. Equipment surfaces that contact with raw materials, intermediate products or finished
products may not cause reactions both of additions or absorption that can affect identity,
quality or purity beyond the specified requirements.
4.7. The production equipment used should not have a bad effect on the product. Parts of
production equipment that are in contact with the product must not be reactive, additive or
absorbent which can affect quality and adversely affect the product.
The surface texture of dies and punches will affect the compressive force generated in the
compression process (Bare et al. 2011). While the corrosion can react with ingredients to form
unhealthy results. Corrosion and crack inflsuitable for food production because it reacts
100
chemically with medicinal or food ingredients. Material suitable for dies and punches is
austenitic stainless-steel type for food grade.
Dies and punches making for very hard materials and complicated shapes are intricated to
implement with ordinary conventional CNC-machining (Sorgaton, Masato, and Lucchetta
2017)(Kiyak and Çakir 2007). Therefore, non-conventional machining processes such as electric
discharge machine (EDM) processes play an important role in dies and punches manufacturing
(Singh and Singh 2012). EDM is a non-conventional machine that uses spark energy with a large
electric current between the mold (cathode) and the workpiece (anode) for the metal cutting
process (Vishwakarma, Khare, and Parashar 2012). EDM sinker process is very sensitive to the
type of machine, changes in process parameters such as discharge current, electrode materials,
pulse on time, servo sensitivity and the type of material. Spark with a temperature around
10,000oC will leave the cutting crater, increase surface hardness, crack and grain boundary
corrosion in A316. These parameters also affect the smoothness of the dies and punch surface.
Based on the above literature, this research is a very important aim to obtain suitable EDM
process parameters to pursue a high level of surface quality and punch material and to avoid
corrosion and crack form in dies and punches of A316 Food Grade. Corrosion and crack are
found in the grain boundary of A316 at high temperatures. In this research copper and graphite
electrodes are used as the cutting tools.
2. LITERATURE SURVEY
EDM (Electrical Discharge Machining) is a non- conventional machining widely applied in die
and mold making industries to fabricate deep and complex cavity (Chakraborty, Dey, and Ghosh
2014). Unlike conventional machining techniques that use cutting tools, EDM machines form a
workpiece by releasing an electric arc (spark discharge) through two electrodes (Razak et al.
2016). This electric arc causes extremely high heat (around 10,000oC) so that it erodes the
workpiece. The electrical control system produces controlled arc release so that it continuously
erodes and forms workpieces. The dielectric liquid is used as a medium that functions for flushing
remnants of erosion material particles, cooling electrodes and workpieces, as well as electrical
conductors. The schematic of EDM-sinker machine is shown in Figure 1 and EDM cutting
process is shown in Figure 2.
Figure 1: Schematic diagram of EDM Process (Mandaloi et al. 2016)
101
Figure 2: Schematic of EDM die-sinker cutting (Sandeep 2013)
EDM is suitable for cutting the materials with the following properties: very hard and soft,
very brittle, heat-treated part, part with complicated shapes, and conductor (Engelita, Yuhas, and
Muslimin 2019). In the past, a lot of research has been conducted on the effect of EDM sinking
parameters on various performance parameters. The effect of discharge and servo sensitivity
parameters in the surface smoothness of the EDM sinker of SKD 11 material for dies (Andriani,
Sumpena, and Muslimin 2018). Based on the research, roughness increases in proportion to the
discharge current. Examination of machining parameters of current, pulse on time, and pulse
pause time for processing tool steel AISI P20 using copper electrodes concluded that roughness
was increase related to electric current (Kiyak and Çakir 2007). Harpreet Singh, et. al compare
surface roughness and electrode wear with different types of electrodes (Copper, Brass,
Cryogenic Copper, Cryogenic Brass) and current parameters used (Singh and Singh 2012). The
material used was H12 Di-Steel. From this research, the result is that the roughness increases
with increasing electric current and the electrode wear affects the resulting roughness.
Sultan, et al (2014) compared MRR, electrode wear, surface roughness and SEM with the
ANOVA method (Sultan, Kumar, and Gupta 2014). The parameters used are current, pulse off
time and on time. Material EN 353 Alloy steel and copper electrodes as fixed parameters.
Electrode wear has an effect on the pulse on time and off time. Roughness is most influential on
electric current (Kumar and Garg 2010). In the study of U Ashok Kumara, et al compared surface
roughness with the ANOVA method. The parameters used are current, pulse on time and off time
and the material used is AISI 316 and copper as the electrodes. Surface roughness is very
influential on the increase in electric current (Razak et al. 2016). In the study, surface roughness
is compared based on current, voltage, pulse on-time, and off-time parameters. The electrodes
used are copper and AZ31 Magnesium Alloy as the material being examined. Surface roughness
is very influential on the pulse on time (Singh and Singh 2012).
A literature survey revealed that there are published works on the analysis and evaluation of
heat-affected zones (HAZ) of workpiece surfaces machine using different electrodes by EDM
using various important parameters such as pulse duration, peak current and discharge gap of EN-
31 steel (Kumar and Garg 2010). Ashok Kumar, Laxminarayana, and Aravinda (2017)
investigated the optimum values of the major parameters in micromachining of Stainless Steel
(SS) 316 by Die Sinker EDM process by using a 900 µm circular copper electrode. The discharge
current, pulse-on time and pulse-off time, the gap was selected as the process parameters. The
result concludes that the EDM machined surface of A316 resulted in micro- cracks and pores
caused by the high-temperature gradient, which reduces both the precision and operating life of
the machined tooling (Ashok Kumar, Laxminarayana, and Aravindan 2017). Therefore, by
choosing the suitable machining parameters, the corrosion and crack can be avoided from worked
parts.
102
3. EXPERIMENTAL METHOD
3.1 Working objective
The objective of this working is to find the appropriate EDM process parameters to fabricate sink
feature die and punches of Stainless Steel A316
Food Grade for medicine and food processing. Food or medicine products, rotary tablet
compacting machines and dies and punches set are shown in Figure 3. Die sinking process in
dies is shown in Figure 4. Grain boundary corrosion of A316 in high temperature and crack
results in the EDM process. The selection of appropriate parameters can eliminate the crack
and grain boundary corrosion.
Figure 3: (a) Tablet of medicine and food, (b) Rotary tablet compacting machine, (c) Dies and punches set Sink part processed by Sinker-EDM
Figure 4: EDM sinking of dies
3.2 Specimens, EDM Machine and Electrode
The material used is stainless steel AISI 316 food grade with a size of 80 mm x 50 mm x 10
mm for six samples. Chemical composition of AISI 316 food grade is shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Chemical composition of A316 Steel Food Grade
Elements Min (%
weight)
Max (%
weight) C 0.024
S 0.001
P 0.025
Mn 1.29
Si 0.46
Cr 16 16.6
Ni 10 10.1
Mo 2 2.06
N 0.05
(a) (b) (c)
103
Table 1. Chemical composition of A316 Steel Food Grade
Elements Min (%
weight)
Max (%
weight) C 0.024
S 0.001
P 0.025
Mn 1.29
Si 0.46
Cr 16 16.6
Ni 10 10.1
Mo 2 2.06
N 0.05
The electrodes used are Copper and Graphite as shown in Figure4. Electrode specifications
of graphite and copper are shown in Table 2.
(a) (b)
Figure 5: Electrode (tools): (a) graphite and (b) copper Table 2. Copper and Graphite Electrode Specifications
3.3 Experiment set up
The experimental setup in this research is shown in Figure 5 and Figure6. The experiments were
conducted on CNC EDM Die Sinker of SKM having a maximum capacity of 25A discharge
current working.
The fixed (independent) process parameters are a pulse on time, pulse off time, gap voltage,
servo sensitivity, gap distance, and dialectical fluids of CPC Kerosene. The parameters set in
Properties Copper (99%
pure)
Graphite (15
µm average
grain size)
Melting point (oC) 1083 4800
Density (g/cm3) 8,96 0.0015-0.0018
Thermal
Conductivity (W/m-
K)
391 80
Electrical resistivity
(Ω-cm)
1.69 3,5 x10-3
Specific heat
capacity (J/g-oC)
0,385 7.10
104
this research are shown in Table 3.
The dependent variables in this research used are as follows: Discharge Current: 6A, 12A, and 21A
Electrodes: Copper and Graphite.
The value of important dependent parameters is selected based on the previous author
experiment.
Table 3. Fixed parameters of EDM
Fixed parameters Symbols Unit
Pulse on Time Ton µsec 120
Pulse off Time Toff µsec 3
Gap Voltage V Volts 45
Servo Sensitivity Svo 1/min 5
Gap distance mm 0.02-0.1
Dielectric Fluid CPC Kerosene
Type of EDM Sinker
SKM EDM
Figure 6: An experimental setup
Figure 7: An experimental setup (before process)
Figure 8: An experimental setup (in process)
The research specimen before the EDM process is shown in Figure 7 and after the EDM
105
process is shown in Figure 8.
Figure 9: A speciment before EDM processing
Figure 10: A speciment after EDM processing
Specimens testing scheme in this research are as follows: Six specimens were tested for microhardness with the ASTME384-17 test standard.
Two specimens were tested for Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) and Energy Dispersive
Spectroscopy (EDS).
4. RESULT AND ANALYSIS
106
4.1 Surface Roughness of EDM Process Results
The test is carried out on six specimens. Three specimens for copper electrode and three
specimens for graphite electrode using 6A, 12A, and 21A. The results of the surface roughness
test are shown in Figure 11. While the conversion to metric roughness for average is shown in
Table 4. This analysis indicates that the EDM process yields the roughness surface. Therefore,
surface finishing such as grinding is needed to meet the roughness criteria for medicine and food
dies and punches. 6A discharge current results smoother surface both in graphite and copper
electrodes. Therefore, further analysis in this research is conducted in this parameter.
Table 4. Roughness conversion into metric standard
Specimen
Average
roughness
(µm)
Roughnes
s level
Raw
Material
2.582 N8
Cu, 6A 6.836 N9
Cu, 12A 10.18 N9
Cu, 21A 8.248 N9
Gr, 6A 6.314 N9
Gr, 12A 7.558 N9
Gr, 21A 11.58 N9
4.2 SEM and EDS Analysis
Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) is used to analysis the microstructure of material while
Energy Dispersive Spectroscopy (EDS) to analyze the chemical composition of the material.
Figure 12 shows the result of an SEM of A316 Food grade. It concludes that neither grain
boundary corrosion nor crack appears in this raw material. Figure 13 shows the result of an
EDS of A316 Food grade. Based on the EDS result, the chemical composition of A316 is
relatively the same content between catalog and EDS testing. Table 5 shows the comparison of
chemical composition between catalog and EDS testing results.
Figure 12: SEM result of raw material A316 Food Grade
107
Figure 13: EDS analysis result of raw material A316 food grade
Table 5. Chemical composition of A316 Steel Food Grade from Catalogue and EDS
Elements Catalogue (% wt) EDS (% wt))
C 0.024 6.1
S 0.001 -
P 0.025 -
Mn 1.29 1.59
Si 0.46 0.69 Cr 16-16.6 15.13
Ni 10-10.1 9.28
Mo 2-2.06 1.55
N 0.05 -
O - 2.16
Figure 14 shows the SEM of the material surface processed by EDM with 6A discharge
current and Copper electrode (cutting tool). The composition of material after processing resulted
from EDS is shown in Figure 15.
Figure 15: EDS analysis result of of EDM Process with 6A and copper electrode
Figure 16 shows the SEM of the material surface processed by EDM with 6A discharge
current and graphite electrode (cutting tool). The composition of material resulted from EDS is
shown in Figure 17.
Globule Crater
s
Hole Recast
108
Figure 14: Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) of EDM Process with 6A and copper electrode
Figure 16: Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) of EDM Process with 6A and graphite electrod
Figure 17: EDS analysis result of of EDM Process with 6A and copper electrode
Based on Figure 14 and Figure 16, crates and recasts are formed due to high temperature
resulted from discharge currents of the EDM process. the hole and lumps (globule) also result.
These phenomena are characteristics of in EDM process.
EDM process resulted in different surface layers of material because the heat resulted from
discharge energy. The layers are spattered EDM surface layer, recast layer (hardened), heat
affected zone (annealed) and base metal. The first three surfaces are called an altered metal zone.
Globule
Craters
Hole Recas
t
Globul
e
Recas
t
Hole
s
Crater
s
109
Figure 18 shows the surface layer of material processed by the EDM sinker. The thickness of
each layer depends on the set up of the EDM parameters. However, the thickness can be predicted
as shown in Figure 19.
Figure 18: The surface layer of material processed by EDM (Minna 2011)
Figure 19. The thickness of each layer
Figure 20 shows SEM on the recast layer of AISI 316 processed by EDM with 6A current and
copper electrodes parameters. SEM shows the Cr23C6 formed on the grain boundary recasting
structure. Cr23C6 is an agent of grain boundary corrosion. A crack will appear when the
corrosion deep and link to each other..
Figure 21 shows the EDS result in the recasting layer area. Cl and O appears in the
recasting layer as a reaction with dielectric fluids at high temperatures.
Figure 21: EDS of recasting layer processed by EDM using 6A and copper electrode
Figure 22 shows SEM on the HAZ layer of AISI 316 processed by EDM with 6A current
and copper electrodes parameters. The crack appears in this layer.
110
.
Figure 20 SEM of recast of EDM Process using 6A with copper electrode
Figure 22: EDS of recasting layer processed by EDM using 6A and copper electrode
Most materials including stainless steel change the microstructure due to solidification and
heat treatment process. Chromium carbide precipitation (Cr23C6) is formed at grain boundary
at high temperatures (around 500-900oC) while solidification. that chromium carbide is an
agent of corrosion because of activity differences with the other microstructure on the grain
boundary.
This research investigate that the electrode influences only on the MRR (Material Removal
Rate). However, the effect related to grain boundary corrosion cracking and crack is relatively
the same. Figure 23 shows the MRR value of the EDM Process using copper and graphite
electrodes.
Figure 23: MRR of copper and graphite electrode
Crack
Grain
Boundary
Ferrite (white)
Perlite
Grain
Boundary
Cr23C6
(Corrosion) Crack
potentially
111
5. CONCLUSIONS
SEM analysis on the surface yield more roughness surface than raw material. SEM also
indicates that on the recasting and HAZ layer (cross- section) of A316 material processed by
EDM found grain boundary corrosion and cracking. Corrosion is identified by the Cr23C6 in the
grain boundary in both the recasting layer and the HAZ layer processed by EDM using copper
and graphite electrodes. Besides grain boundary corrosion and cracking, impurities such as Cl and
O are also found on the surface of material processed by EDM.
The process parameters can be applied in the EDM process to fabricate punches and dies.
However, because of the grain boundary corrosion and cracking will reduce the lifetime and
health considered.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I would like to thank Pusat Penelitian dan Pengabdian Pada Masyarakat Politeknik Negeri Jakarta
(P3M PNJ) which supported and funded this research.
REFERENCES
Andriani, Fauziyah Giska, Ade Sumpena, and Muslimin. 2018. “PENGARUH PARAMETER ARUS DISCHARGE
DAN SERVO SENSITIVITY PADA KEKASARAN PERMUKAAN PROSES SINKER EDM MATERIAL
DIES SKD 11.” In
Seminar Nasional Teknik Mesin Politeknik Negeri Jakarta, ISSN 2085-2762, , 270–78.
Engelita, Lisbhet, Darius Yuhas, and Muslimin. 2019. “Pengaruh Parameter Arus Discharge Dan Elektroda
Terhadap Nilai MRR Pada Proses Sinker EDM Material AISI.” In Proseding Seminar Nasional Teknik
Mesin, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta, , 727–33.
Kiyak, M., and O. Çakir. 2007. “Examination of Machining Parameters on Surface Roughness in EDM of Tool
Steel.” J. Mater. Process. Technol 191(1–3): 141–144.
Kumar, H, and R K Garg. 2010. “Analysis and Evaluation of Heat Affected Zones in Electric Discharge Machining
of EN-31 Die Steel.” 17(April): 91–98.
Mandaloi, Gangaram, Subhash Singh, Pradeep Kumar, and Kaushik Pal. 2016. “Effect on Crystalline Structure of
AISI M2 Steel Using Tungsten – Thorium Electrode through MRR , EWR , and Surface Finish.”
MEASUREMENT 90: 74–84. http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.measurement.2016.04.04 1.
Minna, Technology. 2011. “An Introduction to Electrical Discharge Machining.” (August 2014).
Mohan, Shailender. 2012. “Compession Physics of Pharmacetical Powders: A Review.” International Journal of
Pharmaceutical Sciences and Research (IPSJR) Vol. 3(6).
Razak, M. A. et al. 2016. “Electrical Discharge Machining on Biodegradable AZ31 Magnesium Alloy Using
Taguchi Method.” Procedia Eng 148: 916–922.
Sandeep, Kumar. 2013. “Current Research Trends in Electrical Discharge Machining : A Review.” 2(2): 56–60.
Singh, H., and A. Singh. 2012. “Examination of Surface Roughness Using Different Machining Parameter in
EDM.” 2(6): 4478–4479.
Sultan, T., A. Kumar, and R. D. Gupta. 2014. “Material Removal Rate, Electrode Wear Rate, and Surface
Roughness Evaluation in Die Sinking EDM with Hollow Tool through Response Surface Methodology.” Int.
J. Manuf. Eng: 1–16.
112
113
THE ROLE OF EXTERNAL AUDITORS IN MODERATING THE INFLUENCE
OF FAMILY OWNERSHIP TOWARDS TAX AVOIDANCE
Sabar Warsini1), and Titi Suhartati2)
1 Department of Accounting, Jakarta State Polytechnic, Depok, 16424 2
Department of Accounting, Jakarta State Polytechnic, Depok, 16424
[email protected]; [email protected]
Abstract
The purpose of this study is to examine the effect of family ownership on tax avoidance and also to
examine the effect of moderating the quality of external auditors on the relationship. The object of
research is public companies listed on the Stock Exchange using a sample of 508 company years.
Hypothesis testing uses a multivariate regression analysis. This study found evidence that family ownership
has negatively affected on tax avoidance. Based on the test of the moderating effect, it was found that the
quality of external auditors has a moderating effect, namely, the negative influence of family ownership on
tax avoidance is greater in the companies audited by industry specialization auditors. This finding proves
that qualified external auditors can act as an effective corporate governance mechanism to protect
investors from opportunistic actions by management.
Keywords: tax avoidance, family ownership, auditor quality, corporate governance mechanism
INTRODUCTION
Indonesia is one of the countries that rely on tax as the most dominant source of state revenue,
therefore the government continues to strive to strengthen the regulatory instruments related to
taxation in Indonesia to maximize the potential revenue from the tax sector (Amri, 2017). Contrary
to the position of the state as a tax recipient, in terms of taxpayers in particular corporate tax
(corporate) taxpayer is a very significant burden. The enactment of a corporate income tax rate of
25% means that companies are required to surrender a quarter of the profits to the state, this
encourages taxpayers to make various efforts to avoid taxes.
In addition to the number of tax rates, many factors influence tax avoidance. One factor is the issue
of corporate governance. The governance of public companies in Indonesia as well as public
companies in other emerging markets has its unique characteristics, namely the presence of
concentrated ownership in certain groups of shareholders. Warsini (2018) is
114
consistent with Hanazaki and Liu (2007) finding that the structure of public ownership in Indonesia
is concentrated and dominated by family ownership with dominance ranging from 28% to 72%.
Regarding tax avoidance behavior, a question arises whether family ownership encourages
management to avoid tax. As the majority owner of family ownership is an effective controller of
management performance (Audretsch, Hulsbeck, and Lehmann, 2014).
The results of previous studies have not been conclusive, some studies have found that family
ownership negatively influences tax avoidance (Martin, 2016; Masripah, Diyanty, and Fitriasari,
2017). Others find family ownership has a positive effect on tax avoidance (Gaaya, Lakhal, and
Lakhal, 2017; Mafrolla and D'Amico, 2016). Even some studies have not been able to prove the
influence of family ownership on tax avoidance (Koh, Park, and Han, 2011). Based on the results of
existing research, there is a suspicion that the influence of family ownership on tax avoidance is not
merely direct but there are other factors that determine the direction of the relationship between
family ownership and tax avoidance by company management.
In the agency theory, it is stated that the external auditor, in this case, the public accounting firm
(KAP) is one of the mechanisms of corporate governance that can control management discretion.
Richardson, Taylor, and Lanis (2015) stated that auditor quality has a crucial role in reducing agency
problems that arise due to conflicts between management and owners. About to tax avoidance
actions Noh, Doocheol, and Guiral, (2014) state that qualified auditors with mastery of industry
specialization have broader capabilities for the ins and outs of their clients' businesses including tax
planning. Based on this background, this study was conducted to test the role of external auditors in
moderating the effect of family ownership on tax avoidance in public companies in Indonesia.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
This research is a quantitative study using the population of all public companies listed on the Stock
Exchange with the analysis year 2015-2018. The research sample is determined with the following
criteria: (1) not the financial and banking industry, (2) not the industry
that has special tax regulation treatment (lex specialist), (3) is not an industry that is subject to final
tax, (4) financial data is available, ownership data, and other complete data according to analysis
needs. The data used are secondary in the form of financial reports and annual reports for 2015-
2018 obtained from the Indonesian Capital Market Electronic Library (ICAMEL), and the website
company.
The hypothesis developed is: "External auditors play a role in reducing the tendency of family
ownership of tax avoidance".
The model developed to prove the hypothesis is:
TAVit = αi + α1FAMit + α2(FAM * AUDIT)it + α3AUDITit + α4SIZEit + α5LEVit + εit .. (1)
Operationalization of Variables:
TAVit is Tax Avoidance, measured using two measures namely effective tax rate(ETR) and
discretionary permanent book-tax differences in the Frank, Luann model, Lynch, and Rego (2009).
ETR is calculated by dividing the total tax burden by net income before tax, while PermBTDit =
α0 + α1INTANGit + α2MIit + α3CSTEit + α4permBTD (t-1) it + εit. PermBTDit is the permanent
book-tax differences of a company i, period t, INTANGit is the value of goodwill and intangible
assets of a company i, period t, MIit is the profit (loss) of the minority, CSTit is the current tax
expense, permBTD (t-1) it is lag 1 year permanent value difference. Non-discretionary book-tax
115
differences are fitted value equations and discretionary book-tax differences are residual values or
errors of these equations.
FAM is family ownership, namely all individual and company ownership that is registered
(ownership of 5% and above must be registered) except public companies, countries, financial
institutions and public ownership that are not required to be registered. AUDITit is the audit quality
of the company i, measured by auditing industry specialization. In this study, industrial
specialization audits are measured by the size of the market share controlled by the auditor. The
market share value is obtained by dividing the total ratio of sales to assets of all companies audited by
a particular KAP divided by the total ratio of sales to assets of all companies in the industry, in the
form of a variable dummy with a value of 1 if the auditor's market share is at least 20% and 0 for
the other. FAM * AUDIT is the result of an interaction between family ownership and the quality of
external auditors.
SIZEit and LEVit variables as control variables are variables that in general and consistently have
been proven to be variables that affect tax avoidance. SIZEit is measured by the natural logarithm of
the total assets of the company and LEVit is the leverage of company i, period t as measured by the
ratio between the total debt (long-term debt + short-term debt) to total assets of the company i,
period t.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
The study population covered 2207firm years, after a sample selection with the specified criteria
obtained a final sample of 508 company years or 23% of the population. The general description of
the research sample is represented by the results of the descriptive statistical analysis (not tabulated)
as follows: The TAV variable (ETR) has an average value of 0.2011 illustrating that on average the
sample company has an ETR below the statutory tax rate set at 25%. And the TAV variable
(discPBTD) has a positive average of 0.0037 indicating that accounting profit is greater than fiscal
profit and can be interpreted that the sample companies are indicated to avoid tax. The average
value of FAM of 0.5334 gives an illustration that the average family ownership in public companies
in Indonesia is 53.34%. These results are still consistent with the results of studies that have been
conducted (Hanazaki and Liu, 2007; Masri, 2012; Warsini, 2018). While the AUDIT variable has an
average value of 0.3121, illustrating that 31.21% of auditors (KAP) in Indonesia are industrial
specialization auditors.
This study uses panel data structure therefore, the hypothesis testing method uses the model
Ordinary Least Square (OLS)of panel data structure. After conducting the estimation model
selection test using a series of tests, namely: chow test, Hausman test, and Breusch Pagan
Lagrange Multiplier test, the OLS estimation model used is the model Fixed Effect (FEM). The final
results of testing the hypotheses are summarized in the following table 1.
Table 1. Results of Testing the Effect of External Auditor Moderate
TAV (ETR) TAV (discPBTD)
Independent
Variable
Predicti
on
coefficient p-value coefficient p-value
Constant 0.2153 0.000 *** 0.0408 0.004***
FAM - / + -0, 1207 0.242 -0.0068 0.021 **
116
FAM *
AUDIT
+/- 0.1847 0.020 ** 0.7733 0,000 ***
AUDIT - -0.0083 0.067 * -0.0241 0.008 ***
SIZE + 0.0106 0.017 ** 0.0066 0.014 **
LEV - -0.0079 0.913 -0.0146 0.069 *
N 508 508
Estimation Model FEM FEM
Adjusted R2 0.3817 0.4211
Prob. F-test 0.0000 *** 0.0000
Note:
*** significant at α = 1%, ** significant at α = 5%, * significant at α = 10%
TAV (ETR): tax avoidance measured using ETR, TAV (discPBTD): tax avoidance is
measured using discretionary permanent book tax differences. FAM: family ownership,
FAM * AUDIT: interaction of family ownership with external auditors, AUDIT: quality
of external auditors, SIZE:
company size measured using the natural logarithm of total company assets, LEV: the
level of corporate leverage.
The test results show that the direct effect of family ownership on tax avoidance results obtained are
not conclusive. By using ETR as a tax avoidance measure it is found that family ownership factors do
not have a significant effect on tax avoidance. However, by using the discretionary permanent
book-tax differences, this study found that family ownership has a negative influence on tax
avoidance. It can be interpreted that the dominance of family ownership in public companies in
Indonesia does not encourage management to avoid tax.
The results of this study are in line with Martin (2016), Masripah, Diyanty, and Fitriasari (2017).
This finding supports alignment theory (Ferrero, Rodríguez, Lázaro, and Sanchez, 2016) as well as
Madison, Holt, Kellermanns, and Ranft (2016) which states that the existence of family ownership
control does not lead to expropriation of minority shareholders so that it does not encourage
management to make policies which will only benefit him.
The results of testing the role of the external auditor (KAP) on the tendency of family ownership to
avoid tax proved significantly that the quality of auditors has the effect of
strengthening the negative influence of family ownership on tax avoidance. This finding is in line
with Gaaya, Lakhal, and Lakhal (2017) who also found that auditor quality can reduce the positive
relationship between family ownership and tax avoidance. Quality auditors tend to protect their
reputation, if the client company is caught doing tax evasion, the auditor has a high risk and will be
very dangerous if the tax fraud is detected by the tax apparatuses. Donohoe and Knechel (2014)
stated that tax aggressive poses a high risk and litigation costs for external auditors. The negative
effect of auditor quality on tax avoidance was also stated by Kanagaretnam et al. (2016) which states
that Big4 qualifying auditors are more concerned with reputation.
117
CONCLUSION
This study aims to examine the moderating role of external auditors on the effect of family
ownership on tax avoidance measures in public companies in Indonesia. It can be concluded that
greater family ownership in public companies does not encourage corporate management to avoid
tax. The negative effect of family ownership on tax avoidance is even greater in companies audited
by external auditors (KAP) who have the qualifications as industry specialization auditors.
One limitation of this study is the measurement of family ownership using ownership immediate so
it does not adequately illustrate the flow of control rights, further research would be better if using
the measure ultimate.
REFERENCES
Amri, Muhtadin, (2017). Effects of Management Compensation on Tax Avoidance with the
Moderation of Directors' Gender Diversification and Corporate Executive Risk Preference
in Indonesia. Journal of Assets (Accounting for Research), 9 (1), 1-14
Audretschab, DB., Hülsbeckcd, D and E. Lenmanncd, (2014). Families as active monitors
of firm performance. Journal of Family Business Strategy. 4 (2) 118-130
Donohoe, M. and Knechel, W. (2014), "Does corporate tax aggressiveness influence audit
pricing?" Contemporary Accounting Research, 31 (1), 284-308
Ferrero, Rodríguez, Lázaro, and Sanchez, (2016). Handbook of Research on Family
Business. Edward Elgar Publishing
Frank, MM, Lynch, L., J., and Rego, S., O. (2009). Tax Reporting Aggressiveness and Its Relation
to Aggressive Financial reporting. The Accounting Review, 84, 467-496
Gaaya, S., Lakhal, and Lakhal, (2017). Does Family Ownership Reduce Tax Avoidance?
The Moderating Effect of Quality Audit, Managerial Auditing Journal, 7-42
Hanazaki, Masaharu and Qun Liu, (2007). Corporate Governance and Investment in East Asian
firms: Empirical Analysis of Family Controlled firms, Journal of Asian Economics, 18:
76-97
Kanagaretnam, K., Lee, K., Bee, J., Lim, C. and Lobo, G. (2016), "Relationship between auditor
quality and corporate tax aggressiveness: implications of cross-country institutional
differences", Auditing: A Journal of Practice and Theory, 35 (4), 105- 135
Koh, S., Y., Park, S., Y., and Han, J., S. (2011). Conformity between the Book Income & Taxable
Income of Family Firms, and its Value Relevance: Empirical Evidence from Korea. the
12th Asian Academic Accounting Association, Bali-Indonesia, 1-29
Madison, K., Daniel T. Holt, Franz, W. Kellermanns and Annette L. R (2016). Viewing Family
Firm Behavior and Governance Through the Lens of Agency and Stewardship Theories.
Family Business Review. 29 (1) 65–93
Mafrolla, E. and D'Amico, E. (2016). Tax Aggressiveness in Family Firms and The Non- Linear
Entrenchment Effect. Journal of Family Business Strategy. 7 (3), 178-184
Martin, JK (2016). Tax avoidance in family firms: Evidence from large private firms, Journal of
Contemporary Accounting & Economics, 15 (2), 145-157
118
Masripah, Vera D., and D.Fririasari, (2017). Controlling Shareholders and Tax Avoidance:
Family Ownership and Corporate Governance, International Research Journal of
Business Studies, 8 (3), 167-180 Noh, Doocheol, and Andres Guiral, (2014). The
Effect of Auditor-Provided Tax Services on Tax and Financial Reporting
Aggressiveness, Advanced Science and Technology Letters, 47: 89-92
Richardson, G., Taylor, G., and Lanis, R. (2015), "The impact of financial distress on corporate tax
avoidance spanning the global financial crisis: evidence from Australia ”, Economic
Modeling, 44, 44-53
Warsini, Sabar, (2018). The Effect of Family Ownership on the Relationship between
Aggressive Financial and Tax Reporting: Evidence from 10 Asian Countries,
Proceeding Asia Pacific Business and Economics Conference, University of
Indonesia 17-18 January 2018.
119
Venue attributes and destination image influence satisfaction of
Meeting Planners in choosing destination
Etty Kongrat, Djuni Akbar, Annisa Wardhani Abstract
The selection of destinations for the tourist business becomes an important thing for the meeting planner to organize the event. The Meeting, Incentive Travel, Conference and Exhibition (MICE) sectors are one of the special interest category sparked by the Ministry of Tourism that means MICE has a great opportunity to attract a number of tourists through various events. This research is important to examine how the meeting planner chooses a destination for a MICE event.
Data were collected from 51 meeting planner in two destinations, namely Jakarta as the existing destination by using questionnaires with Likert scale 5 and the analysis was conducted using Generalized Structured Component Analysis (GSCA). The results show that the venue is more complete and meets the standards of meeting planner tend to choose the destination for MICE activities. The image of the destination has a positive and significant impact on the performance of the destination, the better the good image of the destination caused by the better the venue is likely to improve the performance of the destination while
the better the image of the destination then tend to improve the performance of the destination. This study has contributed to strengthening and also added Place Marketing generalizations. The results of this study also provide managerial implications for the development of new paradigms in the marketing of tourism destinations, especially destinations for MICE tourism.
Key words: The image of destination, venue, the performance of the destination increase
INTRODUCTION
Indonesia is a country with many potential destinations, but it has not been able to top the list as the
preferred destination for International events. According to statistical data of ICCA (International
Congress and Convention Association).
In 2016, Bali ranked only 61 with 43 international association meetings, while Jakarta lags behind
Jakarta to 169 (15) Located not so far compared to other ASEAN countries such as Singapore, ranked 6
(151), Bangkok 12 (121) and Malaysia ranked 32nd (68th).
MICE destinations are becoming important in an increasingly competitive global tourism environment,
especially venues, pricing, revenue, time and distance, a decisive factor in MICE travel, providing
travelers with motivation and choice of destinations.
MICE (Meeting, Incentive, Convention, and Exhibition) is currently one of the focus of tourism
development in Indonesia. MICE Sektot is one of seven special interest tourism categories triggered by
the Ministry of tourism and Creative Economy, that is, MICE has a great opportunity to attract a large
number of tourists through various events organized by both national and international organizations.
However, it can not be denied that Indonesia is still less ogled as the destination of MICE world-level
implementation. From the research data reported by the International Congress & Convention
Association (ICCA) in the ranking of MICE destination city of the world, there are only 2 cities in
Indonesia that included in list the namely Bali and Jakarta. In 2012, ICCA mentioned that Bali is ranked
the 48th MICE destination city of the world. Meanwhile, Jakarta lags behind in the order of 176. Located
not so far from these two towns Singgapura precisely earned a respectable position in the ranking is to-6.
120
LITERATURE REVIEW
Understanding destinations in the sense of The World Tourism Organization is a location where visitors
spend at least one night and packed in a tourism product that is supported by the services of penunang as
well as attractions and tourism tourism resources sumbe, and has a boundary area, both physically and
administration that shows the image and perceptions of market competitiveness. According to Buhalis
(2000), destinations are a combination of all products, services and experiences offered. Framke &
Baerenholdt (2000) examine further about the destination and conclude that the destination is an area
with an identity generated by the interests, infrastructure and attractions associated with it.
Understanding the venue, the mention of the word venue as a venue for the holding of a MICE event
becomes a very common thing used venue conference, venue exhibitions, venue festivals and many
activities In Oxford Advanced Learner's Dictionary, "venue" means a place where people meet for an
organized event, sporting event or conference which means a place where people gather and meet for an
event, sport or conference. The determination of the venue is very influential
Sach (2010: 171) argues the image is: knowledge of us and attitude toward us who have different groups.
Imagery is the impression, the feeling, the public image of the company. A deliberately created
impression of an object, person or organization ". Image according to Kotler and Keller (2009: 406) are a
number of beliefs, ideas, and impressions held by a person about an object. While the image contained in
a tourist destination known as the destination image, Coshal (2000) in Goddess (2013) states that the
image of the destination is the impression of tourists in general to a tourist destination. Next Qu et al.,
(2011)
Destination image
Sach (2010: 171) argues the image is: knowledge of us and attitude toward us who have different groups.
Imagery is the impression, the feeling, the public image of the company. A deliberately created
impression of an object, person or organization ". Image according to Kotler and Keller (2009: 406) are a
number of beliefs, ideas, and impressions held by a person about an object. While the image contained in
a tourist destination known as the destination image, Coshal (2000) in Goddess (2013) states that the
image of the destination is the impression of tourists in general to a tourist destination. Next Qu et al.,
(2011)
According to Lawson and Baud Bovy (1977) the image of the destination is "the expression of all
objective knowledge, impressions, prejudices, imaginations, and emotional thoughts possessed by a
person or group."
Image is an important concept in the tourism literature (Gartner 1996, p325) shows that the image of the
destination is very important in the set of variables that influence the choice of destination. If `this image
is negative it will have a significant impact on the competitiveness of competitiveness because the image
of the destination has proven to be the decisive factor in determining the choice of visitors (Konecnik,
2004, Lee O Leary & Hong, 2002). Gartner (1996, p 457) suggests that the image of a place as a
potential destination consists of cognitive, affective, and conative components. Cognitive is what is
known, or is thought to be known about potential destinations. Affective is the weighting of what is
known by the consumer value system. Phase shooting of destination image is the stage of choice. This
refers to the decision making process whether to travel to a destination based on the stage of cognitive
and affective development.
Performance is the result or output of a process (Nurlaila, 2010). According to the behavioral approach in
management, performance is the quantity or quality of something produced or services provided by
someone who does the work (Luthans, 2005). Performance is an achievement of work, namely the
comparison between the work with the standard set (Dessler, 2000). Performance is the result of work
both in quality and quantity achieved by a person in carrying out the task according to the responsibility
given (Mangkunagara, 2002).
RESEARCH METHODS
121
This research uses survey method and data collection is done by using questionnaire, question asked in
questionnaire is a question with closed answer, using Likert scale to measure approval level of
respondent to the proposed statement referring to the constructed research. The 5-point Likert scale is
used in obtaining and processing data, where 1 "strongly disagrees" and 5 is "strongly agree". Methods of
collecting data were given to the respondents were 60 and the returned 51 questionnaires. The analytical
method used to estimate the relationship between constructs is GSCA (General Structure Component
Analysis).
RESULT
The following test direct effect hypothesis is intended to test whether or not the influence of exogenous
variables directly to endogenous variables. Hypothesis testing can be known through the value of the
critical ratio (CR). The test criteria states that if the critical ratio (CR) is asterisk or critical ratio (CR) ≥ t-
table (t = 2.00, alpha = 5%) then it is stated that there exogenous exogenous variable influence to the
endogenous variable.
Table 1 Rekapitulation of Analysis SGCA
Eksogen Endogen Estimat
e SE CR
Venue Destinatio
n image 0.425
0.11
4
3.73 *
Venue Kepuasan 0.311 0.07
8
3.98 *
Destinatio
n Image Kepuasaa 0.327
0.10
6
3.09 *
* (Signifikan)
The influence of the venue towards the destination image generates a CR of 3.73 *. This indicates that
the critical ratio (CR) is asterisk or (CR ≥ t-table (t = 2.00, alpha = 5%)). Therefore, it can be interpreted
that there is a significant influence venue towards the image of the destination.
The effect of venue on the satisfaction of the destination resulted in CR of 3.98 *. This indicates that the
critical ratio (CR) is asterisk or (CR ≥ t-table (t = 2.00, alpha = 5%)). Therefore, it can be interpreted that
there is a significant influence venue on the satisfaction
of the destination.
The impact of destination image on the performance of the destination resulted in CR of
3.09 *. This indicates that the critical ratio (CR) is asterisk or (CR ≥ t-table (t = 2.00, alpha = 5%)).
Therefore, it can be interpreted that there is a significant influence of destination image on the
performance of the destination.
Relationship between Variables Destinati
on image
Venue H1 0, 425
H3 0,327 Satisfaction
H2 0,311
122
Figure 2. The amount of influence of each variable
Source: Processed Writer 2017 Results
Based on Discriminant Validity results each indicator in measuring dimensions is indicated by the root of
Average Variance Extracted (AVE). An indicator is said to have discriminant validity if the root of AVE
is greater than the correlation between constructs. Discriminant validity test results can be seen through
the table below:
Table 2 discrimant Validity
KD = Performance of destination
VN KP CD KD
VN 0.871 0.439 0.638 0.64
CD 0.638 0.67 0.857 0.709
KD 0.64 0.629 0.709 0.848
The results of the analysis listed in the table above can be seen that the value of AVE root on the
variable venue, destination image, and the performance of the destination is greater than the
correlation coefficient between variables. Thus discriminant validity of all indicators that measure the
venue variable, destination image, and the performance of the destination is stated fulfilled.
Testing of Construction Reliability
The results of the analysis of AVE root on the variable venue, destination image, and the performance of
the destination is greater than the correlation coefficient between variables. Thus discriminant validity of
all indicators that measure the venue variable, destination image, and the performance of the destination
is stated fulfilled.
Table 3 Testing of constructios realibility
Variabel AVE Alpha
Venue 0.759 0.934
Destination image 0.734 0.939
Performance of destination 0.719 0.844
The reliability test above informs that the venue, destination image, and destination performance results
in AVE values greater than 0.5 and Cronbach's Alpha greater than 0.6. Thus, all indicators that measure
venue variables, destination imagery, and destination performance are stated reliably or reliably used to
measure or explain the variables.
Evaluation of Structural Model
Goodness of Fit Model
The Goodness of fit Model is intended to determine whether the constructed constructs are appropriate or
not. There are several test indices in GSCA analysis. Ie Fit. AFIT. GFI. and SRMR. Criteria using GFI
mention if the value of goodness of fit ≥ cut off value (equal to 0.9) then the constructed constructs have
been appropriate (feasible or good fit). while if the GFI value is within the range 0.8 - 0.9 then the
constructed construct is expressed marginal fit (quite feasible). The results of the feasibility test
constructs that have been summarized in the following table 4
123
Table 4 Fit Model
Model Fit
FIT 0.657
AFIT 0.641
GFI 0.982
Based on the summary it can be seen that the global index of GFI optimization of 0.982 (> 0.9). Thus
based on the criteria, the model has been formed otherwise good fit (feasible). Furthermore the value of
goodness of fit structural model obtained Fit value of 0.657. It can show that the variation of the
performance of the destination can be explained by the overall model of 65.7%, or in other words the
contribution of the venue variable, the overall destination image to the destination performance of 65.7%,
while the rest of 34.3% is the contribution of other variables not discussed in this research.
Hypothesis Testing Direct Effect
Testing of direct effect hypothesis is intended to test whether or not the influence of exogenous variables
directly on endogenous variables. Hypothesis testing can be known through the value of the critical ratio
(CR). The test criteria states that if the critical ratio (CR) is asterisk or critical ratio (CR) ≥ t-table (t =
2.00, alpha = 5%) then it is stated that there exogenous exogenous variable influence to the endogenous
variable.
Table 5 Hypothesis Testing Direct Effect
Eksogen Endogen Estimat
e SE CR
Venue Destinatio n
Image 0.425
0.11
4
3.73 *
Venue
Performanc e
of
destination
0.311
0.078
3.98*
Destinatio n
Image
Performanc e
of
destination
0.327
0.106
3.09*
Information: * (Signifikan)
Hypothesis Testing Direct Effect
The effect of venue on destination image resulted in a CR of 3.73 *. This indicates that the critical ratio
(CR) is asterisk or (CR ≥ t-table (t = 2.00, alpha = 5%)). Therefore, it can be interpreted that there is a
significant influence venue towards the image of the destination.
The effect of venue on the performance of the destination resulted in CR of 3.98 *. This indicates that
the critical ratio (CR) is asterisk or (CR ≥ t-table (t = 2.00, alpha = 5%)). Therefore, it can be interpreted
that there is a significant influence venue on the performance of the destination.
The impact of destination image on the performance of the destination resulted in CR of
3.09 *. This indicates that the critical ratio (CR) is asterisk or (CR ≥ t-table (t = 2.00, alpha = 5%)).
Therefore, it can be interpreted that there is a significant influence of destination image on the
performance of the destination.
VN = Venue Cd CD = C
KD
=
P
124
CONCLUSION
1. Variable venue has a positive and significant impact on the performance of the destination.
This means that the higher the standard of the venue then it is likely to improve the
performance of the destination.
2. Destination image variable has a positive and significant impact on the performance of the
destination.
3. This means that the better the image of the destination is likely to improve the performance of
the destination,
REFERENCEES
Coban, S. 2012. The effect of the image of destination on tourist satisfaction and loyalty: the case of
Cappadocia. European Journal of Social Sciences, 29 (2) : 222-232.
Buhalis, D. (2001), Destination Management Organizations and small and medium sized tourism Enter
enterprises, Conference, Information Society ureaus.
Tourism Management, 22 (2001), Tourism Management, 22 (2001),599-606. (2001) of Denmark, 15-28
Framke, W. & Baeren, J.O. (2000): Destination Construction. Travel & Destination. Proceedings of a
Conference held at Roskidle ≠University 17.02.200. Geography Roskilde University
Working Paper±152/publication from the Tourism Research Centre.
Kotler, Philip dan Keller, Kevin Lane, 2009, Manajemen Pemasaran Edisi 13 Jilid I, Jakarta: Penerbit
Airlangga
Mangkunegara, Anwar Prabu. 2002, Manajemen sumber daya Manusia. Remaja Rosdakarya Bandung.
Luthans, F, 2005, organizations Behavior. New York: McGraw-Hill
Sach , Indraya, 2010, Ilmu Pariwisata, Jakarta: Kementerian kebudayaan Republik Indonesia
Surya Online Surabaya, 2014, Dua Museum Ini Terbengkalai , Pengunjung Bisa Dihitung Dengan Jari
(http://surabaya tribunenews.com/) (diakses pada 2 Februari 2016 pukul 20.00 WIB).
Qu, H., et al, 2011. A model of destination branding: Integrating the concept of the branding the concepts
of the branding and destination image. Tourism Management, 32 : 465-476
125
DESIGN AND BUILD OF BLOOD CLAM ( ANADARA GRANOSA ) SHELLS POUNDING MACHINE WITH ELECTRIC MOVEMENT
MOTOR
R. Agus Murdiyoto , Setiyadi
Department of Civil Engineering PNJ, Campus UI Depok 16424
ABSTRACT
Waste of blood clam (anadara granosa ) shells is waste that could not be decomposed by
soil so that its presence was very disturbing to the surrounding environment. Utilization of waste
blood (anadara granosa) shells in other forms was highly expected by the community, so that their
existence does not disturb the environment anymore. One of the utilizations of blood clam (anadara
granosa) shell waste was that is was used as a fine aggregate to make of various building materials.
In this research , the blood clam (anadara granosa) shell was broken down according to
the size of a fine aggregate (4.75 mm sieve pass) with a fineness modulus of 3.479 and classified
into Zone I category. When viewed from the effectiveness of a blood clam (anadara granosa) shell
pounding machine with electric movement motor , to pound 1000 grams the amount of material
collision loss was 93.50 grams or 9.35 % with a time of 1 minutes. When using a manual tool, the
amount of material collision loss was 21.00 grams or 2.10 % with 60 minutes
Key words : pounding machine, blood clam (anadara granosa) shells, fine aggregate, electric movement
motor
1. INTRODUCTION
Blood clam (anadara granosa) is one of the marine animals that has long been known as a cheap
source of protein and rich in essential amino acids (Bukhari D et al, 2011)[4]. The use of blood clam
(anadara granosa) as a source of animal protein is only meat, while the shells have not been
optimally utilized so that they will accumulate on the surface of the soil. Waste of blood clam
(anadara granosa) shells is waste that cannot be decomposed by soil ,so that its presence is very
disturbing to the surrounding environment (Wijaya, Erwin 2012) [9]. The number of blood clam in
2015 amounted to 39,000 tons per year (DJPB, KKP 2015) [5]. With a large amount of blood
shellfish catch, then the shell waste can be calculated.
Referring to the 2016-2021 Jakarta State Polytechnic Research Strategic Plan achievement, one
of which is focused on the study of advanced material engineering based on environmentally
friendly materials, the research on the utilization of waste blood clam (anadara granosa) shells
that can be changed in shape is very in accordance with the PNJ Research Strategic Plan. Besides
that, it is also in line with the expectations of the community, so that the existence of waste blood
clam (anadara granosa) shells does not disturb the environment anymore.
One of the uses of waste shells from blood clam (anadara granosa) shells is to change their form
into fine aggregates (building materials) that can be used for concrete. By adding artificial aggregate
from waste shells of blood clam (anadara granosa) shells it is expected that the compressive
strength of concrete increases so that it can be categorized as an artificial building material. In
previous studies, blood clam (anadara granosa) shells can be used as an aggregate mixture for
lightweight concrete, with a compressive strength of 85.176 kg / cm2 with a mixture ratio of 1
PC: 3 Fine Aggr : 4 Clam Shells (Winanti, Titiek. 2014)[10]. In the previous research conducted by
the author with the title utilization of blood clam (anadara granosa) shells as a fine aggregate
making lightweight concrete brick produces compressive strength of 33.45 kg / cm2.
In that study, the author in making artificial aggregates from shells of blood clams (anadara
granosa) using a manual mash so it requires a long time in the process of collision. In order to
accelerate the process of accumulating waste of blood clam (anadara granosa) shells the author tries
to make the design and build of a blood clam (anadara granosa) shell pounding machine with
electric movement motor. This research aims to
126
a. Create a tool with a simple design to accelerate the process of accumulating waste of blood
clam (anadara granosa) shells into fine aggregate .
b. Test the effectiveness of the tool during the process of solving the waste of the shells of blood
clams (anadara granosa) takes place
Problem
Waste of blood clam (anadara granosa) shells is waste that cannot be decomposed by soil so that
its presence is very disturbing to the surrounding environment. Various methods are attempted by
humans to convert waste blood (anadara granosa) shells into a useful thing, from recycling waste to
utilizing waste for wall decoration and for a mixture of building materials. One of which will be
discussed in this paper is the utilization of waste blood shell shells (anadara granosa) by changing its
shape into fine aggregate for the manufacture of building materials. The problems in
this study are:
a. How to design tools to process the accumulation of waste blood clam (anadara
granosa) shells into fine aggregate
b. How the effectiveness of the tool during the process of solving the waste of the shells of
blood shells (anadara granosa) takes place.
2. METHODOLOGY .
Materials and Research Tools
In this research conducted through 2 stages , namely:
Stage I: Making blood clam (anadara granosa) shells pounding machine with electric
movement motor
a. Design of a blood clam (anadara granosa) shell pounding machine
b. Making a blood clam (anadara granosa) shell pounding machine
Stage II: Test tool
a. Test the machine
b. Conduct seave analysis until the collision results meet the requirements as fine
aggregate.
3. ACHIEVED RESULTS AND OUTCOME
Stage of making tools
At the stage of design and buil blood clam (anadara granosa) shell pounding machine with
electric movement motor , this is done by trial and error.
Figure 1 : Crushing part of blood clam shell (first design)
The final design is the best design than the previous design.
127
Figure 1: Crushing part of blood clam shell (final design)
In the second or final design, all the shells of the blood clam have been completely destroyed.
Tool Specifications:
Maximum capacity : 2000 grams Dimensions : 60 x 75 cm Rotation speed : 1420 rpm
Composite material : Iron plate, shaft iron, serrated plate iron, angle iron
Production standard : 1000 grams / 60 seconds
Specifications of Electric Motors
Type
KW
: BLA 100L 1-4
: 2,2, HP = 3
Volt : 220/380
AMP : 8.8 / 5.1
RPM : 1420, Hz = 50, Pole 4
Ph : 3 phase
Tool Parts Clam
Testing the effectiveness of the tool At this stage the tool is tested on the effectiveness of the tool
in producing finely aggregated masses. Tool effectiveness test aims to compare the productivity of the shell
shredder crusher with an electric drive motor with a clam shell crusher. The results of the comparison of the
128
two tools are as the following table :
Table 1: Comparison of the effectiveness of the research and manual tool
Shells
Crushers
Weight
of the
shell
first
(gram)
Weight
after being
destroyed
(gram)
Average
weight after
destroyed
(gram)
Time
taken
(minu
tes)
Break
down
with an
electric
pounding
machine
1000,00
897,00
916,00
906,50
1,00
Break
Down
with
manual
tools
1000,00
980,00
978,00
979,00
60,00
From the above table it can be concluded that the time needed to make fine aggregate from the shell of a
blood clam (anadara granosa) by using an electric drive motor for 1.00 minutes, but the material lost an
average of
93.50 grams or 9.35 %. The time needed to make fine aggregate from the shell of a blood clam (anadara
granosa) with a manual tool for 60.00 minutes, the material lost an average of 21.00 grams or
2.1%.
Testing the results of the collision By using the results of this research the Grain Fineness Modulus
and fine aggregate zones can be identified as in the following table.
Table 2: Fineness Modulus and resulting aggregate zones
Sieve
Size
(mm)
Weight
retained
(grams)
Percent
weight
retained (%)
Comulative
% weight
retained (%)
Cumulative
% weight
passing (%)
Zone 1
Specifica-
tions
4,75 0 0 0 100,00 90– 100
2,36 37,40 7,48 7,48 92,52 60 – 95
1,18 300,30 60,06 67,54 32,46 30 – 70
0,60 86,30 17,26 84,80 15,20 15 – 34
0,30 35,50 7,10 91,90 8,10 5 – 20
0,15 21,40 4,28 96,18 3,82 0 – 10
PAN 19,10 3,82 100,00 0,00 -
Sum 500,00 100,00 347,90
129
Fineness Modulus = 347.9 :100 = 3.479 Fine aggregates derived from blood clam (anadara
granosa) shells have a grain fineness modulus of 3.479 and enter Zone 1 with the fine-grained fine
aggregate categories
4. CONCLUSION
From the discussion in the previous chapter the following conclusions
1. A blood clam (anadara granosa) shell pounding machine with an electric movement motor
as a result of the design in this reasearch can pound a clam shell into a fine aggregate zone
1 with a finennes modulus of 3.479
2. Effectiveness of a blood clam (anadara granosa) shell pounding machine with an electric
movement motor can pound a blood clam (anadara granosa) shell 1000 grams into
fine aggregate weighing
906.50 grams or 90.65% in 1.0 minute. The aggregate of collision results lost was 9.35%
5. REFERENCES
[1] American Society for Material Testing, 2014. Annual Book of Standards,ASTM C 150-2014
[2] American Society for Material Testing, 2015. Anual Book of Standards, ASTM C 39-2015
[3] Agel Alerta F, Dahlia. 2016. Study on Making Shells Crusher. Pekanbaru
[4] Bukhari, D. 2011. Fishery Product Industry Raw Materials. Pekanbaru : Mina Mandiri Press.
[5] DJPB, KKP. 2015. Statistics of Capture Fisheries in 2015. Jakarta
[6] Mulyono, Tri. 2004. Concrete Technology . Jakarta: Canisius
[7] Samekto, Wuryati, Rahmadiyanto, Chandra. 2001. Material Technology. Jakarta: Canisius
[8] Indonesian National Standard (SNI S04- 1989-F). Requirements for Concrete Forming
Materials for Construction
[9] Wijaya, Erwin. 2012. Utilization of Shellfish Waste as a Mixture of Paving Block
Manufacturing. Surabaya : UPN Veteran
[10] Winarti, Titiek. 2014. Utilization of blood clam shells for Building Materials. Surabaya :
Publisher of Surabaya State University
[11] http : // indonet work.co.id/2013/06/ Appropriate tools (April 13, 2013)
130
131
Design of Document Management System for Program Study
Accreditation in Manado State Polytechnic
Muhammad K, Bakary, SE.MSi1, Mariska Charlota Walean, SE., M.Si, Deky E.W Mundung, SE., MM and DR. Ir. Efendy Rasjid, M.Si., MM
1Business Administrastion Departement Politeknik Negeri Manado, Manado, Indonesia
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected],
Keywords: Integrated Document Management System, and Higher Education Accreditation.
Abstract: The Manado State Polytechnic currently does not have an integrated data center, so there are
many problems such as reporting and documenting the results of data based on 7 standards for
Higher Education Accreditation. This study aims to, 1) Evaluate the current document
management system; 2) Design an integrated document management system. To achieve
these objectives, researcher using qualitative research methods with semi-structured interview
instruments and document analysis.In the first year of this research has succeeded in making a
road map for “Program Study” that will propose 9 standard accreditation (IAPS Study Program
Accreditation Instrument version 4.0). The results of this study were implemented in the
management of”program study” accreditation documents at the Manado State Polytechnic.
1 INTRODUCTION
Accreditation is a frightening specter in every higher education institution whereas the accreditation
process is generally managed by manually without using a system. A document management system that is
not integrated which creates many problems during the accreditation process . In the future the
accreditation process is in accordance with “BAN PT” Regulation No. 2 Tahun 2017, will use 9 Standards
that emphasize on Process, Output and Outcome. This requires the “Program Study” to prepare a
structured, systematic document management system that is integrated.
In increasing the accreditation in the Department, especially for “Program Study” in the Manado State
Polytechnic, it is faced with the lack of availability of complete documents. A number of documents that
have not been arranged properly and systematically due to lack of equipment that supports the existing
documents placement, both in the Department and in the “Program Study”.
Manado State Polytechnic has been established for more than 30 years and has 6 Departments and 19
“program Study”, has begun to implement an Internal Quality Assurance System and is certified by
referring to the ISO 9001: 2000 Quality Management System (SMM), which has been revised to ISO 9001:
2008 QMS. In 2017, the Manado
State Polytechnic began to develop the Higher Education Internal Quality Assurance System in
accordance with the mandate of Undang-Undang No. 12 Tahun 2012. But in reality is not significant
increasing accreditation both at the “program Stud” and institutional level, there are only a few “Program
Study” accredited B values and there are 7 Accredited C.
Based on the above problems, research try to provide solutions or answers to get an effective and
efficient integrated document management system both software and hardware using 9 Standards. By
looking at the current process of managing the accreditation document management system that has not
been systematically organized, the researcher is very interested in conducting research with the title,
"Development of an Integrated Document Management System in Supporting the Accreditation of the
Manado State Polytechnic
The purpose of this study is to: (1). Evaluate the current document management system in the
implementation of accreditation at “program study” nt and Manado State Polytechnic Institution, (2).
Design an integrated document management system in support of increasing accreditation at the Manado
State Polytechnic,.
132
2 THEORETICAL REVIEW
2.1 Accreditation
Accreditation is the process of evaluating and measuring the quality of institutions or programs study
conducted by a team of peer experts (assessors) based on established quality standards. Accreditation is the
determination of quality standards and assessments of an educational institution (higher education) by
parties outside an independent institution. Accreditation is also interpreted as an effort by the government
to standardize and guarantee the quality of college alumni so that the quality of graduates between
universities is not too varied and according to work needs.
UU no. 20/2003 National Education System Article 1 paragraph 22 states that Accreditation is an
activity for evaluating the feasibility of a program in an education unit based on predetermined criteria.
BAN PT said that Accreditation is a form of evaluation (evaluation) of the quality and feasibility of higher
education institutions or study programs conducted by independent organizations or bodies outside of
tertiary institutions (Accreditation Standards and Procedures, 2011). Furthermore, the 2011 Accreditation
Socialization material stated "... a process of external quality review used by higher education to
recruitment colleges, universities and higher education programs for quality assurance and quality
improvement (CHEA, 2000)." This means that accreditation can be interpreted as guarantee and quality
improvement program or institution. Furthermore it is said that quality assurance consists of internal
quality and external quality. Internal quality is carried out by quality assurance agencies in the institutions
concerned, while external quality is carried out by the National Accreditation Board. In addition,
accreditation can also be expected to reach the established national education standards. National education
standards are minimum criteria about the education system in all jurisdictions of the Republic of Indonesia
(PP No: 19 of 2005 concerning National Education standards).
National education standards consist of: 1) content standards; 2) standard processes; 3) graduation
competency standards; 4) educational standards and leadership qualities; 5) standard of facilities and
infrastructure; 6) management standards; 7) financing standards; 8) educational assessment standards.
Furthermore, the eight national education standards are packaged and / or modified by BAN PT into nine
standards without reducing the meaning and substance of the standard that can be seen in the following
changes to the IAPS BAN PT 2017, as follow
Figure 1: BAN-PT IAPS Changes
133
While the nine BAN-PT standards are based on BAN-PT Regulation No. 2 of 2017 based
on the criteria of Assessment Percentages are as follows: 1) Vision, Mission, Targets and
Objectives, and achievement strategies; 2) Governance, leadership and quality assurance; 3)
Students and graduates; 4) Human Resources; 5) learning curriculum and academic
atmosphere; 6) Teaching; 7) Research; 8) Abdimaa, 9 Outcomes and Achievements of
Tridharma Schematically the substance of the connectivity or the equivalent of national
education standards with the BAN PT standard (Material Accreditation Socialization, 2018)
appears as follows:
Figure 2: BAN-PT Basic Document Weight
2.2 Objectives and Benefits of Higher Education Accreditation
BAN-PT is an institution that has the authority to evaluate and assess, and determine the
status and quality ratings of tertiary institutions based on established quality standards. The
aims and benefits of higher education institution accreditation are: To provide assurance that
accredited tertiary institution has met the quality standards set by BAN-PT, so as to be able to
provide protection for the community from higher education providers who do not meet the
standard. Encourage universities to continuously make improvements and maintain high
quality.
The results of accreditation can be used as a basis for consideration in the transfer of
college credit, the provision of assistance and allocation of funds, as well as recognition
from other agencies. Accreditation assessment includes: Curriculum of each educational
program, Number of educators, State of students, Coordination of education implementation,
preparation of facilities and infrastructure including academic administration, staffing,
financial and household administrative readiness from tertiary institutions.
Program Study accreditation is the process of evaluating and evaluating comprehensively
the commitment of the program study to the quality and capacity of the organization of
tertiary education programs, to determine the appropriateness of academic programs.
Evaluation in the framework of program study accreditation is carried out by a team of
assessors consisting of peer experts and / or experts who understand the implementation of
academic programs of programs study. Decisions regarding quality are based on evaluation
of various evidence related to established standards and based on the reasoning and
consideration of peer experts. Evidence required includes a written report prepared by an
accredited study program, verified and validated through a field assessment team visit or
assessment to the study program location. The quality of study programs is a reflection of
the totality of conditions and characteristics of inputs, processes, outputs, results, and
impacts, or services / performance of study programs that are measured based on a number
of standards set.
134
3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
This study uses a qualitative method. Qualitative methods are used to explore existing
conditions to get a good understanding of why these conditions occur and how the opinions
of the respondents. Qualitative data will be obtained through Semi-Structured Interviewed
and Document Analysis. To analyze qualitative data obtained through document review and
analysis, the analysis tools that will be used are the Coding Manual and narrative
description. A preliminary study of a literature review on integrated data management
systems in support of increasing accreditation has produced findings that serve as a reference
and basis for research to be carried out. The research will be illustrated in the fish bone
diagram below:
Figure 3: Fish Bone Topic Research Diagram, Design Document Management System for Program Study
Accreditation in Manado State Polytechnic
To answer questions and achieve predetermined research objectives, the research stage is
designed figure 2 as follow;
Figure 4: Research Stages
4 DESIGN OF DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR PROGRAM STUDY
ACCREDITATION IN MANADO STATE POLYTECHNIC
For the Program Study accreditation, reference documents are the Master Plan for the
Development (RIP) and Organization and Work Procedures (OTK). From these two
documents, a precise Strategic Plan can be built. Polimdo's Strategic Plan then becomes the
basis for each department to make a Department Strengthening Plan.
Based on the Department Strengthening Plan, it is possible for the Polimdo Operational
Plan to be built to suit the needs of the Program Study. The Program Study needs are
divided into 5 (five) fields, namely: 1) Education; 2) Research; 3) Community Service; 4)
Additional Tasks; and 5) Support. Each of these fields must have a cycle of determining,
135
implementing, evaluating, controlling, and continually improving which will then become
the Evaluation Document for the Performance Achievement and Quality Assurance of the
Department. If we already have these documents, this means we have complete data for the
Study Program Accreditation.
Fugure 5: Program Studi Accreditation Document Flow Chart.
4.1 Standard 1 Data Flow
Standard 1 contains a description and explanation of the background, policies, strategies,
performance indicators, performance evaluation, and conclusions of the evaluation results
and follow-up related to the Vision, Mission, Objectives, and Strategy of the Department and
Study Program.
4.2 Standard 2 Data Flow
Standard 2 contains a description and explanation of the background, policies, strategies,
performance indicators, performance evaluation, implementation of quality assurance,
measurement of user satisfaction, and conclusions of evaluation results and follow-up related
to the implementation and management of Civil Service, Governance, and Cooperation in
the Department and Study Program.
4.3 Standard 3 Data Flow
Standard 3 contains a description and explanation of the background, policies, strategies,
performance indicators, performance evaluation, implementation of quality assurance,
measurement of user satisfaction, and conclusions of evaluation results and follow-up related
to students of the Department and Program Study.
2.1 Standard 4 Data Flow
Standard 4 contains a description and explanation of the background, policies, strategies,
performance indicators, performance evaluation, implementation of quality assurance,
measurement of user satisfaction, and conclusions of evaluation results and follow-up related
to Human Resources Departments and Programs Study.
2.2 Standard 5 Data Flow
Standard 5 contains a description and explanation of the background, policies, strategies,
performance indicators, performance evaluation, implementation of quality assurance,
measurement of user satisfaction, and conclusions of evaluation results and follow-up related
to financial management, facilities, and infrastructure in the Department and Program Study.
2.3 Standard 6 Data Flow
Standard 6 contains a description and explanation of the background, policies, strategies,
performance indicators, performance evaluation, implementation of quality assurance,
measurement of user satisfaction, and conclusions of evaluation results and follow-up related
136
to the implementation and management of Education activities in Departments and Programs
Study.
2.4 Standard 7 Data Flow
Standard 7 contains a description and explanation of the background, policies, strategies,
performance indicators, performance evaluation, quality assurance, measurement of user
satisfaction, and conclusions of evaluation results and follow-up related to the
implementation and management of the Research Programs and Program Study activities.
2.5 Standard 8 Data Flow
Standard 8 contains a description and explanation of the background, policies, strategies,
performance indicators, performance evaluation, implementation of quality assurance,
measurement of user satisfaction, and conclusions of evaluation results and follow-up related
to the implementation and management of Community Service Programs conducted by
Programs Study.
2.6 Standard 9 Data Flow
Standard 9 contains a description and explanation of performance indicators, evaluation
of performance achievements, implementation of quality assurance, measurement of user
satisfaction, and conclusions of evaluation results and follow-up related to Outcomes and
Achievements of Departments Tridharma and Program Study
3 CONCLUSIONS AND SUGGESTIONS
3.1 Conclusion
1. Document management system and program study accreditation in polimdo oriented majors.
2. The program study accreditation document management system in the polimdo will run if the
department has the following documents: 1) Department Development Plan; 2) Evaluation of
performance achievements and quality assurance majors.
3.2 Suggestion
In the program study accreditation instrument version 4.0 (IAPS 4.0) the role of the
department is crucial in determining the results of the study program accreditation. For this
reason, we advise departments to rush to transform from ancient ways to "digital
management.".
REFERENCES
Baker, S. E., & Edwards, R. (2012). How many qualitative interviews is enough? , 42
Gay, L. R., Mills, G. E., & Peter, A. (2006). Educational research: competencies for analysis and
applications (8th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Education, Inc.
Noviana Catur Wulan Saputri (Sistem Informasi Akreditasi Prodi (Siakap) Berbasis E-Arsip Untuk
Menunjang Persiapan Akreditasi Prodi (Studi Kasus Pada Prodi D3 Universitas Negeri
Semarang).
Sugiyono, 2015, Memahami Penelitian Kualitatif Bandung, CV Alfa Beta Undang-Undang
Nomor 12 Tahun 2012 tentang Pendidikan Tinggi
137
CURRENCY DENOMINATION AS A CONSUMER TRIGGER TO
SPEND MONEY
Elly Mirati1Tetty Rimenda2 @ Politeknik Negeri Jakarta 1Accounting Department, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta
2Accounting Department, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta [email protected]
ABSTRACT
This study aims to prove the money illusion phenomenon where consumers more easily spend their
money, if the money is in a small unit of value. Proof will be made of cash spending and spending with
digital money. Respondents numbered 100 people. They are young consumers who often shop online.
They are also OVO users for at least 1 year. Testing is done by ANOVA. The results prove that there is
no difference in consumers' interest in shopping when using small denomination cash or small
denomination OVO. The Money Illusion Theory is proven when testing is done on consumers' shopping
interests using small denomination cash and large denomination OVO, the result is consumers are more
interested in using small denomination cash. But when the two payment methods are digitally compared,
the results show that there is no difference in consumer interest in shopping using small denomination
OVO and large denomination OVO. Consumers feel a pity to spend digital money in the form of large
denomination OVO. The invalidation of money illusion theory, probably because the consumer does not
see the money in a specific way, so he does not feel sick losing his money. The results of the study can
strengthen the money illusion theory
Keyword : denominations, money illusion, OVO
1. Introduction
Money is a medium to acquire goods and services. When shopping, consumers depend on the
amount of money it has. The more money he has, the more free he spends his money, and vice
versa. Although the amount of money that has become a limit for shopping, apparently in everyday
life, consumers are easier to spend the money when the cash is in small nominal. For example
installment Rp. 50.000/day is cheaper compared to installment I Rp. 1.5 million months. But Rp.
50.000/day is equal to Rp. 1.500.000/month. The condition is in accordance with The principle of
descriptive invariance [1] [6]: Consumer preference will differ when the assessed object is
presented in a different format. In this case the daily installments are in different terms to the
monthly installment. This phenomenon becomes an interesting thing in the science of consumer
behavior[2] Previous research proved the principle of descriptive invariance related to the nominal
value of money [3] [4]. Consumers are more likely to spend money, in small amount than in a large
nominal. For example, consumers are more difficult to spend a nominal value of Rp. 100,000, he
will be thinking again to take the decision to spend it. But if the money is nominal IDR 5.000 IDR
10,000,. IDR. 20,000, more easy to spend. The concept, known as the money illusion. Money
Illusion makes people judge money in the nominally value, rather than a monetary value.
The Money Illusion Theory [4]. explains that consumers value money more on their nominal value
than their monetary value [6]. .So that someone is more appreciative of large nominal money
compared to small nominal money. Although the nominal money is small, but if in large quantities
still have the same buying power with money with a large nominal. Furthermore, this money
illusion will also lead people to spend small denominations while large denominations tend to save.
That happens because the control for money with small denominations is more lenient compared to
money with large denominations.
Raghubir & Srivastava [5] examined the effect of currency denominations on consumer spending
138
behavior. It was concluded that consumers are more difficult to be influenced to shop, if the money
is in a large denomination. People prefer to receive money in large denominations, if they intend to
exercise control over their expenses, because large denominations make people reluctant to spend
their money. So it can be concluded that currency denomination greatly influences the shopping
behavior of consumers. This research by [5] is reinforced by [3] who concluded that behavior
toward currency denominations can be explained through the phenomenon of "bias for the whole"
where there are differences in consumer behavior in spending money based on denominations.
Technological developments affect consumers in shopping and making payments. Shopping can be
done online, so that payment is not necessary to do with cash. The shopping method has changed,
consumers can use digital payment methods such as Gopay, OVO and TCash. With this digital
money, consumers no longer need to carry large amounts of cash. The phenomenon that occurs,
there are still many consumers who are reluctant to use digital money.
Consumers do not yet trust the security of digital money, so they still make payments using cash.
Although actually there is security of digital money by setting a maximum balance of IDR.
1,000,000. Based on observations and interviews with digital money users, it turns out that the
majority of consumers do not charge their digital money according to the maximum limit, but only
top-up as necessary. They prefer to top up many times rather than save money in a digital payment
instrument. With the development of technology, this study examines the theory of money illusion
with the denomination of small money and compares it with cash payments. will affect consumer
interest in spending money.
2. Methodology
The purpose of this study is to examine the effect of small currency denominations with cash
payment methods that will be compared with digital money payments on consumer interest to
spend their money. It is suspected that currency denominations and payment methods will
influence consumers in spending their money. Research framework as below:
To prove the allegation, questionnaires will be distributed. Requirements of respondents are active
OVO users who have used OVO for at least one year. They do top up which is done maximum
IDR 100,000 per top up. In addition to using OVO, they also continue to shop using cash. The age
of the respondent is not restricted. Number of respondents 100, which consisted of 34% men and
66% women. The age composition of respondents 73% aged 21-30 years, then 11% aged under 20
years and 10% aged 31-40 years From this age composition, it can be seen that the majority of
OVO users are young, aged around 21-30 years. They have been using OVO for more than a year,
and are comfortable with this virtual payment method. The item chosen as the object of consumer
purchase is food, considering that food is something that is routinely purchased, the price is cheap,
so it can be purchased with a small denomination
Hypothesis
139
Based on the money illusion theory, it is stated that consumers more easily spend money with
small denominations compared with money with large denominations. With the development of
technology, where consumers can make payments with OVO, it is suspected that there is no
difference between shopping using money with a small denomination, and with a small
denomination OVO so that the hypothesis proposed is:
H1: There is no difference in consumer interest in shopping using small denomination cash
payments compared to small denomination OVO payment methods
Although the phenomenon and theory of money illusion states that consumers are reluctant to
spend cash with large denominations, but because of changes in the lifestyle of digital money
users, it is suspected that consumers are more influenced to spend digital money compared to cash.
So the proposed hypothesis is:
H2: Consumers are more interested in spending their money using small denomination OVO
compared to using large denomination OVO To prove whether the Money Illusion theory which
states that interest in spending more money on payments with small denominations compared to
large denomination payments applies also when paid with OVO. So the hypothesis proposed is :
H3: Customers are more interested in spending their money using small denomination OVO
compared to big denomination OVO
3. Result and Discussion
From the results of data processing using ANOVA which tests consumer interest in spending
money using the cash method with a small denomination, compared to the payment method with a
small denomination OVO and with a large denomination OVO, the descriptive data is obtained as
there is a difference in the mean small deno = 4, 0674, small OVO = 3.9269, Big OVO = 3.6161.
From this data, it is obtained that smal deno has the highest mean, and there are differences from
each of the payment methods. Then the results of the Levene's test = 1.379, p = 0.257> 0.05
indicate that homogeneity between variances is fulfilled. ANOVA test results show that the
test F = 4.621, p = 0.012 <0.050, which indicates that there are significant differences between
the three payment methods To find out the differences between payment methods that affect the
consumer's desire to make a purchase we can see from the table below Dependent variable : WTB
LSD
Tabel 1 : Multiple Comparison
METHODpay METHODpay Mean Difference Std. Error Sig.
smalldeno smallOVO .14055 .15253 .359
bigOVO .45137* .15132 .004
smallOVO smalldeno -.14055 .15253 .359
bigOVO .31081* .15472 .047
bigOVO smalldeno -.45137* .15132 .004
smallOVO -.31081* .15472 .047
SmallDeno and smallOVO have a mean difference of 0.14 with p = 0.35> 0.05 thus there is no
difference in consumer interest in spending their money using cash with small denominations or
using OVO with small denominations. It can be concluded for consumers that payments with small
denomination cash, and payments with small denomination OVO are no different.
Thus H1 is accepted Furthermore, it is compared between Smalldeno and BigOVO, which has a
mean difference of 0.45 with p = 0.04 <0.05. These results reflect that there are differences in
consumer interest in shopping when using the small denomination cash payment method compared
140
to large denomination OVO payments. When we look at the descriptive analysis, it means that the
mean smalldeno> mean bigOVO, (4.06> 3.92), where consumers' shopping interests are greater
when using large denomination cash compared to large denominated OVO payments.
Thus H2 is proven If later payments are made more frequently with OVO, then consumers' interest
in shopping is also tested by using small-denominated OVO compared to large-denominated OVO.
The results of the comparison of the mean smallOVO with bigOVO = 0.31 with p = 0.47> 0.05
there is no difference between shopping using smallOVO compared to bigOVO. With these results
it can be concluded that the money illusion theory is not proven in the OVO payment method,
because consumers' interest to shop using a small denomination OVO with a large denomination
OVO results are the same.
4. Conclusion
From the research that has been done, an interesting finding is obtained, namely consumers do not
feel the interest in spending will be different, if the payment is made with small denomination cash
and with small denomination OVO. In other words, OVO as a digital payment can be accepted by
consumers. Furthermore, the results obtained that consumers are easier to spend money if the
money is small denomination, conversely consumers are more difficult to spend money if the
denomination is large, because consumers feel dear to use it. Meanwhile, if consumers do not see
their money physically, because the money is in digital form, there is no difference in consumer
interest in spending it. Consumers feel the same as using small or large denomination OVOs.
These findings can provide input for marketers to put more emphasis on payment for goods with
OVO by conducting more vigorous promotions. Because consumers will be more able to make
payments using OVO
References
[1]. Gupta Sumeet & Woong Kim Hee (2010): Value-Driven Internet Shopping: The Mental
Accounting Theory Perspective, Psychology & Marketing, Vol.27(1):13–35 (Jan)
[2]. Mahnke Rolf, Benlian Alexander & Hess Thomas (2015) A Grounded Theory of Online
Shopping Flow, International Journal of Electronic Commerce Vol. 19, No. 3, pp. 54–89
[3]. Mishra, Himanshu, Mishra Arul & Nayakankuppam Dhananjay (2006), “Money: ABias for the
Whole, Journal of Consumer Research, 32 (March), 541–49.
[4]. Raghubir, Priya and Joydeep Srivastava (2009), The Denomination Effect Journal of
Consumer Research Vol. 36.
[5]. Srivastava, Joydeep and Priya Raghubir (2002), “Debiasing Using Decomposition: The Case
of Memory-Based Credit Card Expense Estimates,” Journal of Consumer Psychology, 12 (3),
253–64.
[6]. Thaler, Richard H. (1985), “Mental Accounting and Consumer Choice,” Marketing Science, 4
(3), 199–214.
141
DISPUTE RESOLUTION BETWEEN BUSINESS CONSUMERS
AND CONSUMERS THROUGH ARBITRATION IN THE
CONSUMER PROTECTION PERSPECTIVE
Yuyut Prayuti
Universitas Islam Nusantara Bandung
JL. Soekarno Hatta No. 530, Bandung, Jawa Barat
Keywords: Dispute Resolution, Business Consumers, Arbitration, Consumer Protective
Abstract: The background of the problem is; what is the Process and Ways of Resolving Disputes between Business
Actors and Consumers through Arbitration in the Consumer Protection Perspective in Indonesia, What is
the Effectiveness of the Implementation of Dispute Resolution through Arbitration in the Consumer
Protection Perspective in Indonesia? The method of approach in this study uses the Normative Juridical
approach, the specifications of this study are analytical descriptive. Conclusions are; The UUPK Law also
regulates dispute resolution through the court and outside the court. One way to resolve disputes is
through arbitration and alternative dispute resolution is regulated in Law No. 30 of 1999. There are
several ways to resolve disputes, namely Arbitration, Consultation, Negotiation, Conciliation Mediation,
Expert Assessment. The length of the settlement process through Arbitration is 180 working days the
Verdict is Final and Binding so that legal certainty and a sense of justice obtained by the Parties is more
guaranteed in the perspective of Consumer Protection, Effectiveness of Arbitration in the context of
Consumer Protection is more effective, efficient, fast and low cost compared to settlement through the
Court because it is vulnerable to a long settlement due to the burden of cases that have accumulated,
besides those parties who do not agree can make Appeals or Reconsideration Efforts.
A. Introduction.
In the provisions of Article 5 of Law Number 30 Year 1999 it is stated that:
"Disputes that can be resolved through arbitration are only disputes in the field of trade and
rights which according to the laws and regulations are fully controlled by the parties to the dispute."
Settlement or scope of disputes between business actors and the public, in this case consumers, in
addition to litigation or through judicial channels, in laws and regulations can be done by using
various methods of settlement, according to Law No. 30 of 1999 concerning Arbitration and
Settlement of disputes can be sought in advance through the Alternative Pathways for Dispute
Settlement and arbitration, while in the Consumer Protection Act who feel disadvantaged due to the
dispute is through the Consumer Dispute Settlement Agency or BPSK.
There are several reasons behind the emergence of interest and attention to ADR (Alternative
Dispute Resolution) and arbitration: First, the need to provide dispute resolution mechanisms that are
more flexible and responsive to the needs of the parties to the dispute; Second, to strengthen
community involvement in the dispute resolution process; and third, expanding access to achieve or
realize justice so that each dispute that has its own characteristics which sometimes does not fit into
one form of settlement, will be suitable with another form of settlement, so the parties can choose the
best mechanism. (Yuniar Kurniawaty, 2017)
The Consumer Protection Act, explains, among others: taking the Dispute Resolution outside
the court by adopting a Solution through Negotiations, Consultations, Reconciliation,
Mediation and Expert Assessments. As stated in Article 45 paragraph (2) which reads: "Settlement of
consumer disputes can be taken through the court or outside the court based on the voluntary choice of
the parties to the dispute". Dispute resolution outside the Court does not rule out the possibility of
dispute resolution through Peace by establishing a win-win Solution regarding the form of an
agreement regarding the amount of compensation.
Based on the description in the background above, the researcher gave the title of this research:
142
"DISPUTE RESOLUTION BETWEEN BUSINESS CONSUMERS AND CONSUMERS
THROUGH ARBITRATION IN THE CONSUMER PROTECTIVE PERSPECTIVE".
Problem Formulation.
Based on the background of the problem above, the researcher is interested in identifying the
problem as follows:
1. What is the Process and Methods of Settlement of Disputes between Business Actors and Consumers
through Arbitration in the Consumer Protection Perspective in Indonesia?
2. What is the Effectiveness of the Application of Dispute Resolution through Arbitration in the Consumer
Protection Perspective in Indonesia?
Research Methods.
The method of approach in this study uses the Normative Juridical approach, which is an approach
that bases on a review of legal views and uses secondary data or library material as library material as
the main material of research. (Aminudin dan Zainal Asikin, 2004)
The specification of this research is analytical descriptive, namely research that focuses on solving
existing problems in the present. This descriptive research is intended to describe all data obtained
relating to the research title in a clear and detailed manner which is then analyzed in order to answer
the existing problems. Researchers in this study want to obtain a complete and clear picture of
dispute resolution between business actors and consumers in the Consumer Protection Perspective.
DISCUSSION
1. Process and Methods of Settlement of Disputes between Business Actors and Consumers
through Arbitration in the Consumer Protection Perspective in Indonesia.
Consumer protection is any effort that guarantees legal certainty to provide protection to consumers.
(Article 1 number 1 of Law No. 8/1999 concerning
Consumer Protection). The legal certainty includes all efforts to empower consumers to obtain or
determine their choice of goods and / or services needs and to maintain or defend their rights if
harmed by the behavior of business actors as providers of consumer needs. (Tami Rusli, 2012)
Consumer Disputes can be resolved outside the court and through the court. Out-of-court dispute
settlement is a solution through an institution tasked with resolving disputes between consumers and
business actors, namely the Consumer Dispute Resolution Agency (BPSK) and / or other Forums to
reach an agreement.(Janus Sidabalok, 2014)
Law Number 30 Year 1999 Concerning Arbitration and Alternative Dispute Resolution, the forum in
question is the Negotiation Forum, Consultation, Conciliation, Mediation and Expert Assessment and
Arbitration, thus opening three forums and ways to resolve consumer disputes, namely:
1. Settlement of consumer disputes through immediate demands through the Forum of Negotiations,
Consultations, Conciliations, Expert Assessments and Arbitrations.
2. Settlement of disputes through the Consumer Dispute Resolution Agency or BPSK.
3. Settlement of consumer disputes through the Courts.
The process of Settlement of Consumer disputes through Arbitration can be taken and carried out
Settlement of disputes through arbitration which results in a forced decision which is handed down by
a third party, namely the arbitrator or the arbitrator's panel. The arbitration award is final and has
permanent legal force and is binding on the parties. Arbitration award is final means that the
arbitration award is final and therefore cannot be appealed, appealed, or reviewed.
The process of dispute resolution through arbitration is as follows:
1. Starting with the registration and submission of an application for arbitration by the parties
through and addressed to the BANI secretariat.
2. In the case of a dispute to be examined and decided by the arbitral panel, the Petitioner and
Respondent must first appoint an arbitrator.
3. The BANI Secretariat will study the application for arbitration and the contract for the application
143
of arbitration in which the purpose is whether BANI has the authority to examine and decide on
the arbitration application.
4. The BANI Secretariat will send a notification letter regarding the amount of costs that must be
borne by the parties to conduct an arbitration at BANI.
5. After the parties pay the fees, BANI will send a summons for the case examination.
6. The arbitral tribunal must first make mediation efforts between the parties for a period of 40
working days but can be extended according to the agreement of the parties.
7. If mediation is not reached, the Arbitral Tribunal can directly examine and decide upon the Case
which becomes their authority within 180 working days.
While the Process of Settlement of disputes between Business Actors in the world of business and
Commerce with consumers or the public using Consultation, Negotiation, Mediation, Conciliation,
and Expert judgment referring to Law No.30 of 1999 Concerning arbitration and APS is more
Flexsible because the nature of APS is to find a Solution or win-win Solution is not deciding who is
wrong or right so that the agreement will benefit the parties, neither party feels defeated in the
dispute.
2. Effectiveness of the Application of Dispute Resolution through Arbitration in the
Consumer Protection Perspective in Indonesia.
The patterns of settlement of consumer disputes outside the court desired by the UUPK, are the right
choice, because the formulated solution contains a solution that satisfies the disputing party.
According to IBR Supancana, (Supancana, 2006) among the factors that constitute weaknesses in
competitiveness to attract direct investment in a country is the existence of an effective dispute
resolution mechanism which is one of the factors taken into account before deciding to undertake
investment activities.
The effective dispute resolution mechanism involves:
1. Dispute resolution forums, whether through national courts, national and international arbitration
bodies, or other alternative dispute resolution forums;
2. Effectiveness of the validity of the law applied in the dispute;
3. Fast decision making process and reasonable cost;
4. The neutrality and professionalism of judges, arbitrators or third parties involved in the decision
making process;
5. The effectiveness of the implementation or implementation of court decisions, arbitration bodies
and other dispute resolution bodies;
6. Compliance of the parties to the decisions made; "
The parties to the dispute can choose other ways in resolving the dispute they face, if the litigation
path makes their dispute takes a long time, namely by Settling through a non-litigation route or
Alternative Dispute Resolution as set out in Law Number 30 of 1999 Arbitration and Alternative
Dispute Resolution (hereinafter abbreviated as Arbitration Law and APS). Alternative Dispute
Resolution (hereinafter abbreviated as APS) is a dispute resolution process carried out outside the
court. (Yuniar Kurniawaty, 2017)
The effectiveness of the application of arbitration over the court can at least be seen in terms of: First,
the Parties to the dispute can choose their own arbitrators. Second, the implementation of the arbitral
tribunal guarantees unwanted secrecy and publicity. Third, the Final and Binding Arbitration Award.
Fourth, fast and cheap. Fifth, the parties can determine the choice of law, as well as the process or
arbitration held. Sixth, Arbitration procedures are more informal than court procedures. Seventh, the
Arbitrator is also not obliged to follow the arbitrator's previous decision. Eighth, the arbitration
decision has the power of the Executorial through the District Court.
144
CONCLUSION
A. Conclusion
1. The UUPK Law also regulates dispute resolution through the court and outside the court. One way
to resolve disputes is through arbitration and alternative dispute resolution is regulated in Law No. 30
of 1999. There are several ways to resolve disputes, namely Arbitration, Consultation,
Negotiation, Conciliation Mediation, and Expert Assessment. The length of the settlement process
through Arbitration is 180 working days, the Verdict is Final and Binding, so that legal certainty and a
sense of justice obtained by the Parties are more secure in the Consumer Protection perspective.
2. Effectiveness of the implementation of arbitration in the context of Consumer Protection is more
effective, efficient, fast and low cost compared to settlement through the Court because it is
vulnerable to a long settlement time due to a burdensome case load, besides that the parties who
disagree can make an Appeal, Cassation or Review Effort Back.
B. Suggestions
1. There is a need for legal certainty that when the parties in choosing a dispute resolution between
the business actors of the community or consumers through Arbitration or BPSK, the results of the
decision can not be tested in other Judicial institutions.
For Settlement through Arbitration or Consumer Dispute Settlement Agency (BPSK) the results of the
Decision issued through the dispute settlement agency can be done by the Executorial itself not through
the Court.
REFERENCES
A. BOOKS Aminudin dan Zainal Asikin, Pengantar Metode Penelitian Hukum, Jakarta,
PT.RadjaGrafindo Persada, 2004.
Janus Sidabalok, Hukum Perlindungan konsumen, Citra Aditya Bakti, Bandung, 2014.
Suprananca, Ida Bagus Rahmadi, Kerangka Hukum dan Kebijakan Investasi Langsung di
Indonesia, Bogor: Ghalia Indonesia, cet. 1, 2006.
B. REGULATION OF LAWS UU Perlindungan Konsumen No. 8 Tahun 1999
UU No. 30 Tahun 1999 Tentang Arbitrase dan Alternatf Penyelesaian Sengketa
C. OTHER SOURCES: Journals, Articles, Papers, websites
Abpadvocates.com>ini-prosedur- penyelesaiansengketa-melalui-arbitrse. Tami rusli,
Penyelesaian sengketa antara konsumen dan pelaku usaha menurut peraturan
perundang-undangan, artikel volume 3 nomor 1, fakultas hukum universitas
bandar lampung, 2012
Yuniar Kurniawaty, efektivitas alternatif penyelesaian sengketa dalam sengketa kekayaan
intelektual(alternative dispute resolution on intellectual property dispute), Jurnal,
Gorontalo, 2017
145
THE LEGAL IMPACT OF DELAYING FIDUCIARY SECURITY
REGISTRATION IN TERMS OF LAW NUMBER 42 OF 1999
CONCERNING FIDUCIARY SECURITY AND REGULATION OF THE
MINISTER OF FINANCE NUMBER 130 / PMK.010 / 2012
Elis Herlina
Law Faculty, Universitas Islam Nusantara, Bandung, Indonesia [email protected]
Abstract: Article 11 the Fiduciary Security Law stipulates that the object of Fiduciary Security must be
registered at the Fiduciary Registration Office before a Fiduciary Security certificate, which
shall have an executorial power, be issued. This provision is supported by Article 1 paragraph
(1), in connection to Article 2 of the Minister of Finance Regulation No. 130 / PMK.010 / 2012
Concerning Registration of Fiduciary Security for Financing Companies Conducting Consumer
Financing for Motorized Vehicles under the Fiduciary Security Imposition. In its
implementation, there are some financing companies who would like to delay the registration.
Therefore, question arises as to what kind of the legal consequences of delaying Fiduciary
Security registration in terms of Law Number 42 of 1999 concerning Fiduciary Security and
Regulation of the Minister of Finance Number 130 / PMK.010 / 2012. This was an analytical
descriptive research with a normative juridical approach. The data collection of this study was
performed by using literature study technique, while the data were obtained are analyzed in a
qualitative juridical manner. The legal consequence of delaying the Fiduciary Security
registration is that, if the debtor performs defaults, the financial institution would be incapable to
execute Fiduciary Security for there is no Fiduciary Security certificate available, so that it can
only be done by filing a civil suit to the District Court, and that the position of the financial
institution would merely be as the concurrent creditor. Therefore, Financial Services Authority
should provide supervision so that financing companies would be willing to carry out their
obligation in registering the Fiduciary Security.
Keywords: financing company, fiduciary, registration
1. Introduction
Fiduciary Security could not be separated from credit problems. As a material guarantee (in the
practice of financing, for instance) fiduciary is very favored and popular because it fulfills the needs of
the community. Fiduciary users (debtor), especially small and medium-sized companies, such as
shops, retailers, craftsmen, restaurants, agricultural businesses, and so on, find that fiduciary security is
beneficial for the their business and is not so burdensome. Therefore, it can be said that the presence of
fiduciary security may bring multiple benefits. As for the creditor, fiduciary security would not
hamper them to master the collaterals for their daily business needs; on the other hand. Meanwhile, the
financing company would find it quite practical to perform fiduciary binding procedures and Banks do
not need to provide any special place for storing the collateral, unlike in the pawnshop. [1]
Fiduciary law is currently regulated by Law No. 42/1999 on Fiduciary Security. Article 11 of the
Fiduciary Security Law requires that the object of Fiduciary Security should be registered at the
Fiduciary Registration Office located in Indonesia. Registration of object of Fiduciary Security shall
be carried out at the fiduciary provider place of domicile, and the registration shall include any
objects, whether the objects are located inside and outside the territory of the Republic of Indonesia, in
order to fulfill the principle of publicity, as well as a to guarantee the certainty of Fiduciary Security
objects for other creditors. The Fiduciary Registration Office issues a Fiduciary Security Certificate on
146
the same date as of the receipt of the application for registration. The Fiduciary Security Certificate, as
referred to in Article 14 paragraph (1), shall include the words “For the sake of Justice of the Divine
God" and possess an executorial power equal to a court decision which has obtained permanent legal
force, meaning that this Fiduciary Security Certificate may be immediately executed/carried out
without undergoing a trial process and examination through the court, and it is final as well as binding
to the parties. If the debtor makes default, the fiduciary receiver will be eligible to sell the object of
Fiduciary Security at his authority.
The purpose of the registration of this Fiduciary Security is to provide the right for a creditor to be
the preference above the other creditors in taking the payment of receivables which come from the
results of the execution of Fiduciary Security objects due to the debtor defaults. The implementation is
regulated by Regulation of the Minister of Finance of the Republic of Indonesia Number 130 /
PMK.010 / 2012 concerning Registration of Fiduciary Security for Financing Companies Conducting
Consumer Financing for Motorized Vehicles under Fiduciary Security Imposition. In this regulation, it
is determined that all financing companies shall be required to register Fiduciary Security for each
financing transaction within 30 calendar days from the date of consumer financing [2]. However, in
the implementation, there are some financing companies who keep delaying Fiduciary Security
registration.
2. Review of Literature
Fiduciary, as a guarantee institution, has long been known and enforced in Roman society which
originally grew and lived in customary law. Based on historical links, Fiduciary Security institutions
are now regulated in jurisprudence and recognized by the law.
There are two types of Fiduciary Security, and they are: Fiducia cum creditore and fiducia cum
amico. Both of which arise from the agreement called the pactum fiduciae and are further followed by
the transfer of rights or in iure cession. Fiducia cum creditore contracta means the promise of trust
made together with the creditor, that the debtor will transfer the ownership of an object to the creditor,
as collateral for the debt, under the consent that the creditor will transfer the ownership back to the
debtor if the debt has been settled. [3]
In fiducia cum creditore, there are several important things which constitute elements in the legal
relationship between the debtor and the creditor, such as: [4]
a. The debtor transfers ownership of the object to the creditor.
b. The object submitted is recognized as the collateral of the debt.
c. Physically, objects which are used as collateral for debt shall be controlled by the debtor.
d. The creditor shall be obliged to return the property rights to the debtor after carrying out his
obligations.
In Indonesia, the existence of fiduciary was recognized by jurisprudence based on the
decision of HGH on 18 August 1932. The case is as follows: [5]. Pedro Clignett borrowed
money from Bataafsche Petroeum Maatschappij (BPM) with the guaranteed title of a car in
trust. Clignett retained his control on the car based on the loan agreement which would be
terminated if Clignett neglected to pay his debts and the car would be taken by BPM. When it
was clear that Clignett would not pay off the debt at the specified time, BPM demanded the
handover of the car from Clignett, but this handover was rejected by Clingett on the grounds
that the agreement made was invalid. According to Clignett, the guarantee was fiduciary, but
because the pawning property remains in the debtor's power, the pawn is not valid according
to Article 1152 paragraph (2) of the Civil Code. In its decision, HGH rejected the reason
uttered by Clignett's because, according to HGH, the guarantee made between BPM and
147
Clignett was not a lien, but was the transfer of title in a trust or fiduciary manner that had
been recognized by Hoge Raad in Bierbrouwerij Arrest. Clignett shall be required to submit
the guarantee to BPM. Currently, with the enactment of Law Number 42 of 1999 concerning
Fiduciary Security, our lawmakers have chosen to regulate fiduciaries in written form. The
issuance of the Fiduciary Act is a kind of official acknowledgment from the legislators of a
Fiduciary Security institution, which. to these days, only gained recognition through
jurisprudence. [6]
According to Article 1 sub 1 of the Fiduciary Act:
A fiduciary is the transfer of ownership of an object on the basis of trust, provided that the object whose
ownership rights is transferred remain in the possession of the owner of the object.
Some characteristics appearing in the formulation include: [7]
a. the ownership rights of an object can be transferred
b. performed on the basis of trust
c. the object remains in the possession of the object owner.
3. Methodology
This research was normative juridical research, which means that this research used
secondary data or literature data [8], and it had the characteristic of analytical descriptive,
meaning that it conveyed the description of the facts that were supported by the applicable
provisions. [9] The data collection technique was conducted by performing library research
and collecting secondary data in the form of primary, secondary and tertiary legal materials.
As supporting data, interviews were conducted together with related parties. Then the data
obtained were analyzed using qualitative descriptive methods. [10]
4. Data Analysis
Fiduciary collateral usually used by financing companies when providing credit
loans to meet their consumptive and productive needs. In the practice, while entering the
financing agreements, financing companies include words that are guaranteed on a fiduciary
basis, yet not be made with a notarial deed and not registered at the Fiduciary Registration
Office in order to get a certificate or registration delay. This, as the matter of fact, generates
complex and risky legal consequences. Creditors can be considered one-sided when
exercising their rights of execution and they can be quite arbitrary. Currently, there are
finance companies who execute unregistered Fiduciary Security objects, yet they find that
their actions are safe and smooth because customer’s bargaining power of is still considered
weak in the eyes of the creditors (as owners of funds), and because people’s knowledge is
still low. This weakness is usually exploited by business doers, particularly the business
person in financial institutions' sector. [11]
This is very detrimental to the consumers who should be protected instead.
Following Article 11 of the Fiduciary Security Law, registration of Fiduciary Securities
must be carried out by business doers.
Besides, there are many credit transactions, especially motorcycle loans, whose
executions simply ignore the obligation to pawn goods that are traded by debtors and
creditors, causing legal uncertainty to the debtors and creditors, while the registration of
Fiduciary Security actually gives priority rights (droit de preference) to the fiduciary
receiver among the others creditors. [12]
148
In an agreement related to consumer financing, the process of the Fiduciary Security
Imposition id performed in order to help a financing company in providing financing facility
for its consumers upon the purchase of an item.
The main substances regulated in the Minister of Finance Regulation Number 130 /
PMK.010 / 2012 shall include: [13]
1. The Financing Company that carries out financing for consumer upon motorized
vehicles, with the imposition that the concerned Fiduciary Security must be registered to
the fiduciary registration office.
2. The Fiduciary Security registration requirement is also applicable to the financing
companies who conduct sharia-based financing for the motor vehicle consumers and/or
the financing for motorized vehicle consumer whose execution is performed through
channeling or joint financing.
3. Financing companies must register the Fiduciary Security at the fiduciary registration
office no later than 30 (thirty) calendar days from the date of the consumer financing
agreement.
4. Financing companies are prohibited to withdraw fiduciary collateral in the form of
motorized vehicles if the fiduciary registration office has not issued a Fiduciary Security
certificate, and they should hand it over to the financing company.
5. Withdrawal of fiduciary collateral objects in the form of motorized vehicles, which will
be performed by financing companies, must fulfill the terms and conditions as regulated
in the Fiduciary Security Act and have been agreed by the parties involved in the
motorized vehicle consumer financing agreement.
Article 5 of the Minister of Finance Regulation Number 130 / PMK.010 / 2012 stipulates that
if a financing company violates this obligation, then administrative sanctions shall be imposed in the
form of: [14]
a. Warning;
b. freezing of business activities, or
c. revocation of business license
Fiduciary Security Certificates which is issued after the period of 30 (thirty) days from the date of the
Consumer Financing Agreement shall have no legal force, for they have passed the time specified in
the Regulation of the Minister of Finance Number 130 / PMK.010 / 2012. Although the Fiduciary
Security Certificate is no longer possessing legal force, it does not mean that the Consumer Financing
Agreement will also be considered as null and void. Therefore, if a breach of contract occurs, the
execution of fiduciary security can be carried out by:
a. Submitting a civil suit to the District Court until the verdict with permanent legal force is granted.
b. Conducting private sales based on the consent of the Fiduciary provider and Receiver 1 (one)
month after they notified the concerned parties and announced it in 2 (two) newspapers
published in the concerned area.
c. asking the help of Alternative Dispute Resolution agencies.
The purpose of fiduciary security registration is to provide legal certainty to fiduciary the receiver and
provider, and the interested third parties, because, with this registration, a Fiduciary Guarantee
certificate will have the right to possess executorial power which is likened to a court ruling with
permanent legal force, meaning that, with a Certificate of Guarantee, this fiduciary can be directly
executed or carried out without going through a trial and examination process in a court, and this
fiduciary is deemed final and binding to the parties, requiring them to carry out the decision. [15]
149
5. Conclusions and Recomendation
Based on the above description, it can be concluded that legal impact of delaying fiduciary
Securities registration, in terms of Law Number 42 of 1999 Concerning Fiduciary Securities and
Regulation of the Minister of Finance No. 130 / PMK.010 / 2012, will be the incapability, suffered by
business doers, in executing fiduciary security whenever the debtor performs defaults, since there is no
fiduciary security certificate that possesses executorial power just like a court decision with its
permanent legal force, so the business actor can only file a civil law to the District Court and the
position of the financial institution only as the concurrent creditor. Therefore, Financial Services
Authority must provide so that financing companies will be willing carry out the obligations of
registering fiduciary security.
6. Suggestions
Supervision from the Financial Services Authority is required so that financing companies will be
willing to carry out the obligations of registering fiduciary security. In addition, Fiduciary Security
Law Socialization still needs to be socialized.
References
[1] Sri Soedewi Mascjhoen Sofwan, Beberapa Masalah Pelaksanaan Lembaga Jaminan Khususnya
Fiducia di dalam Praktek dan Pelaksanaannya di Indonesia, Fakultas Hukum Universitas Gadjah
Mada, Yogyakarta, 1977, hlm. 75.
[2] Ibnu Artadi, Sudarminto dan Wulansari Partinah, Hermeneutika, Vol. 2 Nomor 2, September
2018, hlm. 174
[3] Gunawan Widjaja & Ahmad Yani, Jaminan Fidusia, PT. Raja Grafindo Persada, 2007, hlm. 119.
[4] Tan Kamelo, Hukum Jaminan Fidusia Suatu Kebutuhan Yang Didambakan, Alumni, Bandung,
2006, hlm. 42.
[5] Tan Kamelo, Hukum Jaminan Fidusia Suatu Kebutuhan Yang Didambakan, Alumni, Bandung,
2006,hlm.126.
[6] J. Satrio, Hukum Jaminan Hak Jaminan Kebendaan, PT. Citra Aditya Bakti, Bandung, 2007. hlm. 179.
[7] J. Satrio, Hukum Jaminan Hak Jaminan Kebendaan, PT. Citra Aditya Bakti, Bandung, 2007, hlm.
181
[8] Ronny Hanitijo Soemitro, Metodologi Penelitian Hukum dan Juritmetri, Ghalia Indonesia,
Jakarta, 1990, hlm. 10
[9] Soerjono Soekanto, Pengantar Penelitian Hukum, Universitas Indonesia Pers, Jakarta, 1986, hlm.
86.
[10] Maria S.W. Sumardjono, Pedoman Pembuatan Usulan Penelitian, Fakultas Hukum UGM,
Yogyakarta, 1989, hl. 24-25.
[11] Grace P. Nugroho, “Eksekusi Terhadap Benda Objek Perjanjian Fidusia dengan Akta di Bawah
Tangan”, dalam : <http://www.mediakonsumen.com/Artikel 1164.html>
[12] Eva Andari Ramadhina, Penerapan Asas Jaminan Fidusia dan Perjanjian Pada Pendaftaran
Jaminan Fidusia Dalam Pembiayaan Konsumen, Privat Law, Vol. V No. 1, Januari 2017
[13] Ibnu Artadi, Sudarminto dan Wulansari Partinah, , Hermeneutik, Vol. 2 Nomor 2, September
2018,hlm. 177.
[14] Ibnu Artadi, Sudarminto dan Wulansari Partinah, , Hermeneutik, Vol. 2 Nomor 2, September
2018,hlm. 179.
[15] Yurizal, Aspek Pidana dalam Undang-Undang Nomor 42 Tahun 1999 Tentang Jaminan Fidusia,
(Malang, Media Nusa Creative, 215), hlm.33.
150
151
Performance Analysis Of Electric Vehicle Powertrain System With Three
Condotion Angles
F.Zainuri 1,2, D. A. Sumarsono 1, M. Adhitya 1, G. Fauzan 1, M. Triananda 1,F.Arrafi 1, F.A.Falah 1 1Department of Mechanical Engineering Universitas Indonesia 16424, Indonesia
2Department of Mechanical Engineering Politeknik Negeri Jakarta 16425, Indonesia
Keywords: Electric vehicle, performance, powertrain, traction, two-speed transmission.
Abstract: This study analysed the powertrain electric vehicle (EV) system performance with two-speed
transmission. This research analysed various terrain conditions as a variable that will be used as a
reference in measuring the level of reliability of the vehicle’s performance, refers to its specification,
center of gravity and tires radius. The results were obtained by selecting suitable transmission ratio
which are 1.96 for the first gear and 1.25 for second gear. The required traction to do gearshift by the
motor is not big enough thus the gearshift becomes smoother. Base on the friction analysis with
traction, it can be concluded that in a 10° road slope, the vehicle is unable to yield traction of 6000
rpm at second gear due to the slope drag is higher than the vehicle traction. As a result, the vehicle
is able to travel of 65.30 km/h at second gear while of 49.98 km/h at the fisrt gear. Whereas at a
slope of 20°, the result showed that the vehicle is able toyield traction of 5000 rpm at first gear due to
the slope drag is higher than the vehicle thrust/traction. Therefore, the vehicle is able to travel of
41.65 km/h at the second gear and of 49.98 km/h at the first gear.
1. INTRODUCTION
The simulation results showed that the proposed controller reduces fuel consumption in the real driving cycle and additional capital of about 21% and 6% respectively [1]. The combination of renewable energy resources can be applied to hybrid electric vehicles (HEV) for the next generation transportation that exploits various aspects and techniques of HEV from energy management system (EMS) [2].
Figure 1. Power Train System [1]
The storage system consists of fuel cell (FC) as the main power source and solar cell (SC) as an
additional resource. A nonlinear controller based on a nonlinear model system utilizes Lyapunov
stability design techniques [3, 4].
In Battery Electric Vehicles (BEV), heat that arises from the mistake of the battery work process
needs to be anticipated, because of incorrect traction and friction can cause overheating that can
152
maked dangerous [5].
The effect of strength performance on the layout of the powertrain system was verified by using
computer aided engineering (CAE) and the electric weight balancer [6]. Several studies presented an
increase in energy efficiency in EV by exploiting several considerations which are in the spotlight as
the main transportation of the future [6, 7, 8]. They are, first, integrated motor-transmission (IMT)
with motors and gearboxes directly installed and the adoption of controller area network (CAN)
technology. Secondly, wireless power-transfer-systems (WPTS) based on wireless electric vehicles
(WEVs). Third, classified as roadway powered electric vehicles (RPEVs) and stationary charging
electric vehicles (SCEVs). Fourth, the design and implementation the online electric vehicle
(OLEV) system. The testing of the role of renewable energy and powertrain optimization in order to
minimizing daily carbon emissions were conducted for plug-in hybrid electric vehicles and
electrically-powered vehicles [9, 10]. For manual transmission, the zero-shift mechanism is an ideal
arrangement to increase transmission efficiency [11].
Figure 2. Transmission Gear Ratio[1]
The combination of the electric engine and the powertrain distinguishes powertrain architecture and
increases the energy efficiency and reduces torsional vibration [10, 12]. The proposed gear ratio
transmission can be seen in Figure 2. The aim of this study is to find out the performance of traction
force when the vehicle goes on a flat plane 0˚ and incline angle > 0°.
2. METHODOLOGI
a. Vehicle Specifications
Table 1. Vehicle Data [20]
No Item Value Unit
A Main dimension and Vehicle Weight
1 Wheel base 2,455 Mm
2 Overall length 3,600 Mm
3 Overall width 1,620 Mm
4 Overall height 1,520 Mm
5 Wheel track front 1,420 Mm
6 Whell track rear 1,415 Mm
B Vehicle Performance
7 V max 65 Km/h
8 Passenger carrying capacity(including drivers)
320 Kg
9 Transportcap[acity 50 kg
10 Curb Weight 780 Kg
11 GVWR 1,150 kg
C Performance Motor
12 Maximum Power 61.13/5,000 kW/rpm
13 Maximum Torque 116.78/5,000 kW/rpm
The vehicle that will be reviewed is the city car type vehicle with the required vehicle data can be
seen in Table 1. The location of this center of gravity depends on the geometry of the vehicle and the
weight distribution of the vehicle [14]. The vehicle's center of gravity and tires radius
153
In Figure 3 showed a car is on a flat road in condition. Fz1 and Fz2 are the normal force on each axle
of the front and rear tires. The force on the front and rear tires was calculated by using equation (1, 2)
[11].
Figure 3. Modeling Normal Wheel Force and Wheel Radius
The chosen tire is radial tire type 175/65 R14. Tire specifications: wheel diameter = 14 inch; tire
width
= 175 mm; the ratio of tire height to width = 65%. To calculate the tire radius based on known
tire specifications is using Equation 3 [14].
b. Calculation of Vehicle Friction Style
a..Fiction Roll (Rolling Resistance) The road that will be passed by this vehicle is an urban road in the form of asphalt with good conditions so that the amount can be calculated by Equation 4 [15]. The value of the friction roll coefficient is determined based on Table 2.
Tabel 2. Rolling Resistance Coefficient [10]
No Type of road For at v =14
m/s
F(mean
value)
Asphalt-concrete and cement concrete road
1 In excellent
state 0.017 0.014-0.018
2 In satisfactory state
0.018 0.018-0.020
3 Cobblestone pavement
0.025 0.023-0.03
b. Air And Grade Resistance Air friction is only calculated if the vehicle speed is
≥ 60 km / hour. This vehicle is only planned to have a speed of 65 km / hour. The projection of
the front area of the vehicle for the car can be calculated by Equation 5. The amount of power
needed and air friction is calculated by Equation 6 ,7 [13].
Figure 4. (a) Front of The Car Dimension (b) Forces of Climbing Friction
154
Traction force must not exceed the magnitude of the frictional force between the wheel and the road surface so as not to slip, to calculate the amount of frictional force experienced by the vehicle can use Equation 8 [11]
2.5. Final Drive Transmission Ratio and Vehicle Traction Calculation
The vehicle is planned to have a maximum speed of 65 km / h and it is known that the rear wheel diameter (Dw) is 0.58 m then the rotation on the final drive shaft can be calculated using Equation 9.[12]. Then the rotation on the final drive shaft is 595.38 rpm. The motor is known to have an initial reduction ratio of 3.33 and a two speed ratio = 1.25 assuming transmission efficiency (ηtr) 80%. The amount of the final drive ratio can be calculated using Equation 10 [15].
The amount of torque for a particular round can use Equation 11 [13]. The magnitude of the traction force (Ft) for each motor rotation and the magnitude of the velocity v in certain transmission conditions can be calculated using Equation 12, 13 [12].
Table 3. Equations and Remarks
155
3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
Based on the calculation of the vehicle's weight, the maximum load received by each wheel is 304.75 kg and 270.25 kg. Furthermore, based on the calculation of tire radius, the vehicle tire finger (Rw) is 291.5 mm
a. Total Friction
The average slope of roads in urban areas is between 3–36% (1.7 °-20 °). So that this vehicle is planned to have a gradeability of 10 °. The coefficient of friction (φ) for the asphalt road is 0.5-0.7 [3]. This calculation takes the friction coefficient of 0.7. This designed vehicle is a rear wheel drive vehicle.
Pt = Pg + Pr = 2143.47 N Pt ≤ (0.7).(540.5 kg).(9.81m/s2 ) Pt ≤ 3711.61 N
Based on the results of the analysis, Pt vehicle is still smaller than the value of the friction force so that there is no slip on the vehicle.
Based on the calculation of the power and torque produced by the motor in Equation 11, the maximum power of the motor is obtained at 61.13 kW at 5,000 rpm and the torque produced is 116.75. In Figure 5 (a) there is a graph of motor performance characteristics.
b. Traction force characteristics of speed at each transmission level
Transmission ratio that is very suitable for use in a two-speed transmission is a transmission ratio of 1.96 for the 1st gear and a transmission ratio of 1.25 for the 2nd gear, because it is seen from the graph above shows that the traction force required by the motor is not too large to be able to do gearshift and the gear shift will be smoother than the gear shift from the transmission ratio of 3.417 to the transmission ratio of 1.25 which is less efficient in the gear shifting process and also the traction force needed to do the gearshift will be very large.
Figure 5. Characterization of Motor Perform. & Transmission Traction Forces
c. Traction force characteristics with friction on vehicle speed
Friction experienced by vehicles that travel at a constant speed on a flat road (with a 0 ° incline angle)
is air friction and bolt friction only. On a flat road zero friction and friction inertia are also zero due to
constant acceleration.The friction experienced by a vehicle that travels at a constant speed on a
climbing road (with an incline angle> 0 °) is air friction, friction rolling and friction climbing. The
graph that shows the relationship between the traction force with friction on the speed of the vehicle
at an angle of 0˚ can be seen in Figure 6 .
156
Figure 6. Characteristics of Traction force at 0˚angle
Based on the results of friction analysis with the traction force shown in Figure 10, it can be
concluded that air friction and rolling resistance do not affect the traction force experienced when the
vehicle is moving on a flat plane. The graph that shows the relationship between traction force and
friction on vehicle speed at 10˚ incline can be seen in Figure 6 .
Figure 7. Characteristics of Traction force at 10˚angle
Based on the results of friction analysis with the traction force shown in Figure 7 , it can be
concluded that the vehicle is unable to produce traction force of 6,000 rpm at two speeds with a 10 °
slope, due to the slope drag> vehicle traction force.
So that the vehicle is only capable of traveling at
65.30 km / h at two speeds and the vehicle is also capable of traveling at 49.98 km / h in the 1st gear.
Figure 8. Characteristics of Traction force at 20˚ angle
Graph that shows the relationship between traction force with friction on vehicle speed at 20˚ incline
can be seen in Figure 8. Based on the results of friction analysis with the traction force shown in
Figure 6, it can be concluded that the vehicle is unable to produce traction force of 5,000 rpm in gear
1 with a slope of 2 °, due to slope drag> vehicle thrust / traction force. So that the vehicle is only
capable of traveling at 41.65 km / h in the 1st gear and the vehicle is also capable of traveling at
49.98 km / h in the 1st gear.
157
4. CONCLUSIONS The results of the analysis for performance of the electric vehicle power train system with a two-
speed transmission , it was traction performance on the vehicle carrying capacity of 1,150 kg well.
Then for the selection of transmission ratio that is suitable for use in two-speed transmission is the
transmission ratio 1.96 for the 1st gear and transmission ratio 1.25 for the 2nd gear, because judging
from the graph shows that the traction force required by the motor is not too large to be able to do
gearshift and gear shift will be smoother.
Based on the results of friction analysis with the traction force , that the vehicle is unable to produce
traction force of 6,000 rpm at two speeds with a 10 ° slope, due to the drag resistance> vehicle thrust
/ traction force. So that the vehicle is only capable of traveling at 65.30 km / h at two speeds and the
vehicle is also capable of traveling at 49.98 km / h in the 1st gear. Based on the results of friction
analysis with the traction force , that the vehicle is unable to produce traction force of 5,000 rpm in
1st gear with a slope of 20°, due to slope drag > vehicle thrust / traction. So that the vehicle is only
capable of traveling at 41.65 km / h in the 2nd gear and the vehicle is also capable of traveling at
49.98 km / h in the 1st gear.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This research was funded by Ristekdikti Research Grants (PDD No. 1/E1/KP.PTNBH/2019 and
234/PKS/R/UI/2019) and all parties at the Universitas Indonesia and Politeknik Negeri Jakarta which
provided facilities and opportunities to this research.
The authors thank the anonymous referees for their valuable suggestions which led to the
improvement of the manuscript.
REFERENCES
Montazeri-Gh M and Mahmoodi-k M 2015 Development a new power management strategy for power split hybrid electric vehicles Transp. Res. Part D Transp. Environ. 37 79–96
Hannan M A, Azidin F A and Mohamed A 2014 Hybrid electric vehicles and their challenges: A review Renew. Sustain. Energy Rev. 29 135–50
El Fadil H, Giri F, Guerrero J M and Tahri A 2014 Modeling and nonlinear control of a fuel cell/supercapacitor hybrid energy storage system for electric vehicles IEEE Trans. Veh. Technol. 63 3011-8 Trovão J P, Pereirinha P G, Jorge H M and Antunes C H 2013 A multi-level energy management system for multi-source electric vehicles - An integrated rule- based meta-heuristic approach Appl. Energy 105 304– 18 Kim K J, Lee Y-C and Park J-H 2015 Fundamental research on power train systems for electric vehicles Materwiss. Werksttech. 46 414–9
Zhu X, Zhang H, Cao D and Fang Z 2015 Robust control of integrated motor-transmission powertrain system over controller area network for automotive applications Mech. Syst. Signal Process. 58 15–28
Mi C C, Buja G, Choi S Y and Rim C T 2016 Modern Advances in Wireless Power Transfer Systems for Roadway Powered Electric Vehicles IEEE Trans. Ind. Electron. 63 6533–45
Shin J, Shin S, Kim Y, Ahn S, Lee S, Jung G, Jeon S-J and Cho D H 2014 Design and Implementation of Shaped Magnetic Resonance Based Wireless Power Transfer System for Roadway-Powered Moving Electric Vehicles IEEE Trans. Ind. Electron. 61 1179–92
Hu X, Zou Y and Yang Y 2016 Greener plug-in hybrid electric vehicles incorporating renewable energy and rapid system optimization Energy 111 971–80
158
Wu G, Zhang X and Dong Z 2015 Powertrain architectures of electrified vehicles: Review, classification and comparison J. Franklin Inst. 352 425–48
Zainuri F, Sumarsono D A, Adhitya M and Siregar R 2017 Design of Synchromesh Mechanism to Optimization Manual Transmission’s Electric Vehicle AIP Conf. Proc. 1823
Deuszkiewicz P, Pankiewicz J, Dziurdź J and Zawisza M 2014 Modeling of Powertrain System Dynamic Behavior with Torsional Vibration Damper Adv. Mater. Res. 1036 586–91
Wang R G, Zhang L T, Yu C, Yang Z L and Shi G K 2013 A Test Bench for Power Train of Electric Hybrid Vehicle Adv. Mater. Res. 694–697 1591–4.
159
Modelling and Simulation CFD Analysis in Runner for Cross Flow Turbine Type
Gun Gun R Gunadi1,a), Ahmad Indra Siswantara2), Candra Damis Widiawaty1), Fachruddin1), Jusafwar1),
Adi Syuriadi1), Jauhari Ali1), and Rosidi1)
1) Mechanical Engineering Department, Politeknik Negeri Jakarta, Depok, Jawa Barat, Indonesia (16425)
2) Department of Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Depok, Jawa Barat,
Indonesia (16424)
Abstract
Provision of food, energy, and information with adequate and sustainable to ensure the welfare of the
people life. In 2011, 6 percent of national electricity production supplied by hydropower and 5 percent from
geothermal energy. PLN plans to increase the use of geothermal energy to 13 percent and hydropower are
still 6 percent of the national electricity production. Most of the energy availability fulfilled independently by
people with a lot of built Micro Hydro Power Plant (MHPP) waterwheel type, small enough electricity
capacity of about 100 watts. Though the area has considerable potential for abundant hydro energy. Using
the CFD method as the initial analysis for experiments has more benefits, including saving time and costs.
The variable of flow parameters and geometry can be easily developed to get the desired results. However,
research is needed to improve the accuracy of the results and the optimality of the calculation process; the
study of complex turbulent flow modelling becomes very important. The k-ε model and renormalization group
(RNG) k-ε model are widely used in research to produce the appropriate models and develop the constants
value. This turbulent flow modelling research was conducted to improve the result accuracy and the
calculation process optimality in the turbulent flow of crossflow turbine. Research was done by comparing
the simulation results of k-ε model and RNG k-ε model. The simulation results of the k-ε model and RNG k-ε
model, which is validated by comparing the simulation results with experimental and calculations results.
Both turbulence model provided good results to predict the crossflow turbine power. The k-ε model was
effectively used with comparable results to the RNG k-ε model.
(Keywords: MHPP, axial turbine, low head, numerical simulation, k-ε model, RNG k-ε model)
1. INTRODUCTION
Provision of food, energy supply, and provision of information technology are the pillars of society.
Availability of supply thereof with sufficient and sustainable to ensure the welfare of society.
Impairment of non-renewable energy sources and the expensive development of renewable energy
technologies to encourage an increase in search of new energy sources and the development of
technology, in order to improve the efficiency of energy use.
In 2011, 11 percent of the national electricity production generated by PLN comes from renewable
energy. 6 percent comes from hydropower (hydro) and 5 percent comes from geothermal energy
(geothermal). PLN planned by the end of this decade will increase the use of geothermal energy to
13 percent and hydropower are still 6 percent. Thus the total renewable energy to be developed until
the end of the decade 19 percent of the national electricity production [1].
The increased use of energy cannot be avoided. Based on the data of the Ministry of Energy and
Mineral Resources of the national electricity production has increased in 2007, reaching 140,000
GWH, in line with increasing national electricity consumption reached approximately 120,000
GWH in 2007.
During the first half of 2010, the Java-Bali electricity consumption grew by 10.5%. Realization of
power production in the first half-2010 reach 83.3 Terra Watt hour (TWH) [2]. Micro hydro power
160
plant (MHPP) independently built in society. As in the District of Pamijahan Bogor Regency, West
Java, built the MHPP with a simple water wheel drive small enough electrical capacity of about 100
watts, just enough for home lighting. Though the area has the potential of hydro energy are quite
abundant. In addition to the capacity of small also the construction and installation, very easily
damaged by natural disturbances.
Results of previous research, in the development of MHPP in Wangun Dua Village, Karang Tengah
Village, Babakan_Madang Subdistrict, Bogor regency, by building MHPP the type of turbine plump
with large capacity, leaving few obstacles, among them: because it is developed in the industry
turbine maker, makes it difficult for communities to develop independently. Suppose when people
need care due to technical disruptions, it becomes very depending on the industry.
Development of MHPP waterwheel type had been done, with improved efficiency and increased
protection system. But still have weaknesses in controlling the flow of water, as a source of energy
driving the waterwheel. When the burden of electricity decreased water flow remains at maximum
conditions. These conditions could result in generator the excess energy input, which could lead to
over speed to lower the age or damage the generator. Otherwise when the load goes up, water
supply can cause generator the overload to cause a generator caught fire [3].
Development of MHPP waterwheel type installation is done by adding control channel at Head tank
(Tranquilizer), can maintain the stability of the water elevation and avoid overflow on a waterwheel
when rainfall is high. Framework of the waterwheel and the generator is made of concrete with a
bearing wood, as a cantilever axis waterwheel can keep and suppress vibration. The addition of
electrical protection system with the addition of lightning rod and Automatic Circuit Breaker
protects the generator from overload currents due to lightning and overloaded electrical Usage.
Power load reaches 1000 watts with a less stable voltage. Stable voltage on the imposition of 146-
283,5 watts. Above 283,5 watts, voltage drops below 220 volts. Efisiensi increases, along with the
increase in power generation [4].
An experimental study by extending the contact between the flow of water and waterwheel and
decreasing the momentum due to decrease flow rate. This experiment shows that each of 1/5
maximum extention of pensctock with open channels enhances the average power of 0.7% [5].
Development is carried out on axial turbine type MHPP. With CFD modeling, for the discharge of
0.02353 m/s with the angle of attack impellers must be < 20o. Development and testing of early
models showed optimum efficiency is 11.9% on angle of attack impellers 18o [6]
The development has been done has some disadvantages; MHPP Turbines Plump types require head
is still high, an obstacle irrigation community for irrigation and agriculture, while the MHPP
Waterwheel Type has a low efficiency.
Based on these considerations it is necessary to study the cross flow turbine type MHPP with low
head are more efficient, have a protection system and have the system control the floodgates.
Since hydro turbines are designed individually according to the local situation, this requires a huge
engineering effort. To reduce this effort, the CFD tool, for optimization required. From the used
algorithms, the one based on approximated gradients seems to be the fastest [7].
As a pre analysis, numerical simulation at airfoil more cheap and efficient compared to experiment,
because flowfield and geometrical conditions can be managed easily to get the results. Elliptic grid
generation transform the physical domain to computational domain. Flowfield equations
transformed to computational domain too. Vortex methods with line Gauss-Siedel and ADI iteration
used to get flowfiled equations. Airfoil assumed infinite to breaks problem from three dimensional
to two-dimensional flow. This numerical simulation research verify by experiments result to get
accuration, so it can get as a pre analyze in research. The vortex method examines flowfield of the
NACA four-digit airfoil, adding the flap variations. Results from this study suggest that at low Re
this simulations have good accuration. Lift coefficient of plain-flap bigger 20.4% compared to
without flap or with flaperon, followed by increase of lift coefficient along increasing angle of attack
till 13,4% at angle of attack 18o. Flaperon have facility of control because angle of flap do not
influence characteristic of wing [8].
161
Darrieus-type turbine has been proposed for hydropower utilization of extra-low head less than 2 m.
Experimental results are shown with considering flow behaviors in the runner section [9].
Matrix of the most cost-effective penstock solutions that systematically cover the 0.2–20kW, and in
the larger project it matches them to a modular set of turbines. It shows how to find the relative cost-
effectiveness of alternative penstocks, and concludes with examples illustrating the results [10].
For two existing single tangential inlet volutes, time-averaged radial and tangential velocity and
static pressure measurements of exitflowhave been obtainedon a cylindrical cut plane through the
radial-inflow section using a three-port yawmeter in air. The Reynolds numbers based on inlet pipe
mean conditions, around 105, are well into the fully-turbulent regime and on the order of comparable
water turbines [11].
Regulation of the discharge entering in the turbine is a key issue, which is faced adopting a shaped
semicircular segment, moved inside the main case around the rotating impeller. The maximum
efficiency of the turbine is attained by setting the velocity of the particles entering the impeller at
about twice the velocity of the rotating system at the impeller inlet. If energy losses along the pipe
are negligible, closing and opening the inlet surface with the semicircular segment allows always a
constant hydraulic head and a constant velocity at the impeller inlet, even with different flow rate
entering values. Observed reduction of the turbine efficiency along with the inlet surface reduction is
first investigated; a design methodology, using also CFD simulations, is then proposed [12].
An important component of the management cost of aqueducts is given by the energy costs. Part of
these costs can be recovered by transfonning some of the many existing energy dissipations in
electric energy by means of economic turbines. In this study an experimental work has been carried
out: 1) to lest the perfonnanee of an economic Cross-Flow turbine which maintains high efficiency
within a large range of water discharges. and 2) to validate a new approximated formula relating
main inlate velocity to inlet pressure. It is proved that the proposed formula, according to some
simplifying assumption, exactly links inlet velocity to inlet pressure according to any possible
geometry of the Cross-Flow turbine [13].
This research will begin by comparing the k-ε model and the RNG k-ε model to analyze flow
characteristics to improve the result accuracy and the calculation process optimality in cross flow
turbine type.
2. METHODOLOGY
Turbulence Models
This paper used two turbulence models: the standard (STD) k-ε and the renormalization group (RNG)
k-ε.
The STD k-ε turbulence model has two additional transport equations for turbulent flow; the kinetic
energy transport equation (k), and the dissipation transport equation (ε). Transport equation k is
given by the equation 1 and transport equation ε is given by the equation 2 [14].
𝜕(𝑝𝑘)
𝜕𝑡+ 𝑑𝑖𝑣(𝜌𝑘𝑈) = 𝑑𝑖𝑣 [
𝜇𝑡
𝜎𝑘𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑑 𝑘] + 2𝜇𝑡𝐸𝑖𝑗 𝐸𝑖𝑗 − 𝜌휀 (1)
𝜕(𝜌𝑘𝑈)
𝜕𝑡+ 𝑑𝑖𝑣(𝜌𝜎𝑈) − 𝑑𝑖𝑣 [
𝜇𝑡
𝜎𝑘𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑑 𝛿] + 𝐶1𝜀
𝜀
𝑘2𝜇𝑡𝐸𝑖𝑗 𝐸𝑖𝑗𝑐2𝜀𝑝
𝜀2
𝑘 (2)
Where : 𝜇1 = 𝜌𝐶𝜇𝑘2
𝜀
𝜌is density, U is the velocity vector, μt is the viscosity eddy and Eij Eij is the average speed of
deformation. If i or j = 1, it relates to the x-direction; if i or j = 2, it relates to the y-direction; and if i or
j = 3, it relates to the z-direction. Cμ, σk, σ , C1 and C2 are constants.
The RNG k-ε turbulence model also has two additional transport equations; the kinetic energy
162
transport equation, k, and the transport equation dissipation, ε. Transport equation k is given by the
equation 4 and transport equation ε is given by the equation 5 [15].
𝜕(𝜌𝑘)
𝜕𝑡+
𝜕
𝜕𝑥1(𝜌𝑘𝑢𝑖) =
𝜕
𝜕𝑥𝑗[(𝜇 +
𝜇𝑡
𝜎𝑘)
𝜕𝑘
𝜕𝑥𝑗] + 𝑝𝑘 − 𝜌휀 (3)
𝜕(𝜌𝑘)
𝜕𝑡+
𝜕
𝜕𝑥1(𝜌𝑘𝑢𝑖) =
𝜕
𝜕𝑥𝑗[(𝜇 +
𝜇𝑡
𝜎𝑘)
𝜕𝑘
𝜕𝑥𝑗] + 𝐶1𝜀
𝜀
𝑘2𝜇𝑡𝐸𝑖𝑗 𝐸𝑖𝑗𝑐2𝜀𝑝
𝜀2
𝑘 (4)
Where :
𝑝𝑘 = 𝜌𝑢′𝑖𝑢′ 𝜕𝑢𝑗
𝜕𝑢𝑖 (5)
𝐶∗2𝜀 = 𝐶2𝜀 +𝐶𝜇𝑛3 (1−𝑛/𝑛𝜎)
1+𝛽𝑛3 (6)
𝑛 = 𝑠𝑘/휀 dan 𝑆 = (2𝑆𝑖𝑗𝑆𝑖𝑗 )1/2 (7)
S is the average rate of strain, and Cμ, σk, σ , C1 , C2 , 0 and are constants.
Geometry
Development MHPP axial turbine type low head, efficiency and reliability are increased, the stages
will be carried out as follows:
Figure 1 shows a geometry of the crossflow turbine runner.
163
Figure 1. Geometry of crossflow turbine runner.
length 0.01 m
outer blade diameter 0.15 m
diameter ratio D1/D2 0.82
blade angles β1 88
β2 27
number of blades 32
chord length S 0.01 m
blade profile circular arc R 0.086 m
blade thickness b 0.004 m
Meshing and Boundary Conditions
Figure 2. A 3-dimensional model was used for the simulation. The grid used was a type of
structured cell with dimensions 300×67×3. Construction grid is shown in
164
Figure 2. Meshing simulation model of crossflow turbine.
Determination of the inlet air velocity angle boundary conditions is taken from the velocity vector
distribution results of the simulation of crossflow turbine nozzles (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Velocity vector of the crossflow turbine nozzle simulation results The
parameters data as follows:
angular speed runner : 22.62 rad/s, 18.85 rad/s, 12.57 rad/s
Inlet air velocity components v : 23.62 m/s, 23.31 m/s, 22.99 m/s Inlet
air velocity components w : 30.32 m/s, 29.92 m/s, 29.51 m/s CFD
Simulation
Validation of simulation results is done by comparing the crossflow turbine power curve simulation
results with experimental data and calculations.
3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
The crossflow turbine experiment model (Figure 4), is used for data collection that will be used to
determine the boundary conditions of the simulation, in the development of turbulent flow dynamics
modeling in crossflow turbines.
165
Figure 4. A crossflow turbine experiment model test.
Changes of input variables for crossflow turbine experiments are carried out with changes in flow
rate. The measurement data is shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Crossflow turbine experiment results.
Trends in the torque curve and power of the crossflow turbine experiment for changes in flow rate are
shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6. The increase in velocity is followed by an increase in torque and
turbine power.
Figure 5. Crossflow turbine torque curves for changes in flow rate.
No V P
m s-1 bar Nm rad/s Nm s-1
1 38.44 4 0.049 22.62 1.12
2 37.92 3.7 0.044 18.85 0.82
3 37.41 3.4 0.039 12.57 0.50
166
Figure 6. Crossflow turbine power curve for changes in flow rate. Condition parameters can be
calculated theoretically using input parameter data.
Figure 7. Velocity of fluid through a turbine
∝ ′1=∝′2,𝛽′1 = 𝛽′2,𝛽1 = 𝛽2,
H𝑃 = (𝑤𝑄/𝑔)(𝑣1 cos 𝛼1+ 𝑣2 cos 𝛼2)𝑢1
𝑣2 cos 𝛼2 = 𝑣2 cos 𝛽2 − 𝑢1,
𝑣2 = Ψ𝑣1 ,𝐾𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑖𝑠𝑖𝑒𝑛 𝑒𝑚𝑝𝑖𝑟𝑖𝑠 Ψ = 0,98
𝑣1=𝑣1 cos 𝛼1− 𝑢1/cos 𝛽1
𝐻𝑃𝑜𝑢𝑡𝑝𝑢𝑡 = (𝑊𝑄𝑢1/𝑔)(𝑣1 cos 𝛼1
− 𝑢1)(1 + 𝜓 cos 𝛽2 / cos 𝛽1) (8)
167
𝑊 = Specific gravity
𝑄 = Volumetric flow rate
𝑉 = Absolute velocity
𝑣 = Relative velocity
𝑢 = Tangential velocity
𝛼 = Angle of absolute velocity
𝛽 = Angle of blade
The results of the calculation for crossflow turbine power with a small deviation value compared to
experiments.
Table 2. Results of crossflow turbine power calculations.
No ṁ V
1
H
P
kg s-1 m s-1 Nm s-1
1 2.21E-03 38.44 38o
1.01
2 2.18E-03 37.92 0.97
3 2.15E-03 37.41 0.93
Validation of simulation results is done by comparing the crossflow turbine power curve simulation
results with experimental and calculations results. Figure 8 shows the crossflow turbine power curve
simulation results for changes in flow rate, showing trends in accordance with experiments and
calculations.
Figure 8. Crossflow turbine power curve results of experiments, calculations and simulations for
changes in flow rate
168
Figure 9 shows the crossflow turbine power curve simulation results for changes in flow rate for the k-ε model
and the k-ε RNG model. The curve shows that the simulation results of the two models for the power parameters
have the same results.
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
0
37.25 37.5 37.75 38 38.25 38.5
V (m/s)
Figure 9. Crossflow turbine power curve simulation results for changes in flow rate
The simulation results of the k-ε model and RNG k-ε model, which is validated by comparing the simulation
results with experimental and calculations results. Both turbulence model provided good results to predict the
crossflow turbine power. The k-ε model was effectively used with comparable results to the RNG k-ε model.
4. CONCLUSION
The parameters of the crossflow turbine power simulation results of both the k-ε and RNG k- ε models for
changes in the flow rate, show trends in accordance with experiments and calculations. The simulation results of
both k-ε and RNG k-ε models for power parameters have the same results. The simulation results of the k-ε
model and RNG k-ε model, which is validated by comparing the simulation results with experimental and
calculations results. Both turbulence model provided good results to predict the crossflow turbine power. The k-ε
model was effectively used with comparable results to the RNG k-ε model.
5. REFERENCES
[1] Alkindo, “PLN Tingkatkan Produksi Listrik Dari Energi Terbarukan,” 2012. [Online].
Available: http://www.alkindo.org.
[2] Kontan, “Sepanjang 2010, konsumsi listrik nasional meningkat,” 2012. [Online]. Available:
http://www.kontan.co.id.
[3] G. G. R. Gunadi, A. Syuriadi, Fachruddin, and S. Prasetya, “Pengembangan Pembangkit
Listrik Tenaga Mikro Hidro Type Kincir Air,” in Prosiding Seminar Nasional Hasil
Penelitian dan Pengabdian Kepada Masyarakat (SNP2M) 2011, 2011, pp. 59–64.
[4] G. G. R. Gunadi, Jusafwar, A. Syuriadi, and D. M. Kamal, “Development of Hydraulic
Governing Valve For Micro Hydro Power Plant Type Waterwheel,” in Proceeding of Annual
South East Asian International Seminar (ASAIS) 2013, 2013, pp. 233–240.
[5] G. G. R. Gunadi et al., “Developing a Penstock for Micro Hydro Power Plant of Waterwheel
Type,” in Proceeding of Annual South East Asian International Seminar (ASAIS) 2014, 2014,
pp. 137–152.
[6] G. G. R. Gunadi, C. D. Widiawaty, Fachruddin, Jusafwar, A. Syuriadi, and J. Ali, “Developing
a Runner for Axial Turbine Type Micro Hydro Power Plant with Low Head,” in Proceeding of
Annual South East Asian International Seminar (ASAIS) 2016, 2016, pp. 45–54.
RNG k-ε
k-ε
P (
Nm
/s)
169
[7] R. Eisinger and A. Ruprecht, “Automatic Shape Optimisation of Hydro Turbine
Components Based on CFD,” Task Q., vol. 6, no. 1, pp. 101–111, 2002.
[8] G. G. R. Gunadi, “Simulasi Aliran Lewat Aerofoil dengan ‘Slotted Flap’ Menggunakan
Metode Vorteks,” Politeknologi, vol. 9, no. 3, pp. 35–44, 2010.
[9] K. Shimokawa, A. Furukawa, K. Okuma, D. Matsushita, and S. Watanabe, “Side- wall effect of
runner casing on performance of Darrieus-type hydro turbine with inlet nozzle for extra-low
head utilization,” Sci. China Technol. Sci., vol. 53, no. 1, p. 93−99, 2010.
[10] K. V. Alexander and E. P. Giddens, “Optimum penstocks for low head microhydro schemes,”
Renew. Energy, vol. 33, pp. 507–519, 2008.
[11] A. M. Fuller and K. V. Alexander, “Exit-flow velocity survey of two single- tangential-inlet
vaneless turbine volutes,” Exp. Therm. Fluid Sci., vol. 35, pp. 48–59, 2011.
[12] M. Sinagra, V. Sammartano, C. Aricò, A. Collura, and T. Tucciarelli, “Cross-flow Turbine
Design for Variable Operating Conditions,” Procedia Eng., vol. 70, pp. 1539
– 1548, 2014.
[13] V. Sammartano, G. Morreale, M. Sinagra, A. Collura, and T. Tucciarelli, “Experimental Study
of Cross-flow Micro-turbines for Aqueduct Energy Recovery,” Procedia Eng., vol. 89, pp. 540
– 547, 2014.
[14] H. K. Versteeg and W. Malalasekera, An Introduction to Computational Fluid
Dynamics The Finite Volume Method. Longman Scientific & Technical, England, 1995.
[15] V. Yakhot, S. A. Orszag, S. Thangam, T. B. Gatski, and C. G. Speziale, Development of
Turbulence Models for Sher Flows by a Double Expansion Technique. 1992.
![Masters of Education in Speech-Language Pathology Graduate ... · approved by the Speech-Language Pathology Program Director, and must be signed] by the student, the Speech-Language](https://img.dokumen.tips/doc/110x75/5fb8eb8b46691e34ab2d564e/masters-of-education-in-speech-language-pathology-graduate-approved-by-the-speech-language.jpg)
